JP2020103604A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can carry out appropriate processing in accordance with a situation.SOLUTION: A game machine includes power supply means, first control means which receives power from the power supply means and carries out a first control, a second control means which receives power from the power supply means and carries out a second control, and monitoring means which monitors the power supplied to the second control means and issues a notification to the second control means. The first control means notifies the second control means of indication information with which it is specified that the power is supplied and the first control is started. At a start of the control, when a notification that a power voltage of the supplied power varies from below a predetermined value to the predetermined value or more is issued from the monitoring means, the second control means specifies that at least the first and second control means are reactivated, and starts the second control on the basis of the indication information from the first control means. At a start of the control, when a notification that the power voltage of the supplied power is equal to or more than the predetermined value is issued from the monitoring means, the second control means specifies that only the second control means is reactivated, and starts the second control.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-18

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine capable of playing a game.

As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into the game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is the specific display result, the gaming state (game Therefore, there is a machine configured to give a predetermined game value to a player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) (so-called pachinko machine).

Also, after setting a predetermined number of bets on a predetermined game medium for one game, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each variable. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing, and the variable display of all variable display devices is performed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium predetermined according to the prize is paid out, and when a specific prize is generated, the game state is given a predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (the so-called slot machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine is an advantageous state for the player who can easily hit the ball, or an advantageous state for the player. That is, the right is generated and the condition for paying out the prize balls is easily established.

In the pachinko game machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information), which is started on the variable display device based on the fact that the game ball has won at the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. When it is done, "big hit" occurs. The derivation display means that the symbol (final stop symbol) is finally stopped and displayed. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win is entered. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning holes are won, the winning holes are closed. The number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). Note that the opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach the predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round. Also, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left-middle-right symbol) continue for a predetermined period of time, and stop and shake in a state of being consistent with a specific display result. It is possible that a big hit occurs before the final result is displayed, because it is moving, scaling or deforming, or multiple symbols fluctuate in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. The production performed in a state in which the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach production. Further, the reach state and the state thereof are referred to as the reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbols variably displayed on the variable display device is not the specific display result, the result is “out”, and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a gaming machine, for example, Patent Document 1 describes that a sub-control unit stores error history data and displays it on a liquid crystal display unit. Further, it is described that the types of stored errors include power off.

JP, 2017-153681, A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when the entire gaming machine is restarted and when only the sub-control unit is restarted, the power-off is stored without being distinguished, and therefore, when the power is turned on. There is a possibility that the situation cannot be optimally determined, and the processing is not optimally executed such as unnecessary processing is executed.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing optimal processing depending on the situation.

(1) In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is provided with a power supply means (for example, a power supply board) and a power supply from the power supply means. First control means for performing one control (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11) and second control means for performing second control by receiving power supply from the power supply means (for example, second effect) The CPU 012IW120b for the second effect control mounted on the control board 012IW12b and a monitoring means for monitoring the power supplied to the second control means and notifying the second control means (for example, supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b). And a power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 for outputting a power supply cutoff signal to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, +8V). The means notifies the second control means of instruction information (for example, a setting change command, a setting confirmation command, an initialization designation command, and the like at the time of power-on) capable of specifying that the power is supplied and the first control is started. However, the second control means, at the time of starting the control, when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power source has changed from less than the predetermined value to more than the predetermined value, at least the first control means and the It is determined that the second control means has restarted, and the second control is started based on the instruction information from the first control means (for example, when the power supply cutoff signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control). Waits for the start of control until the input of the power-off signal is stopped, and then executes the processing based on the power-on command such as the setting change command, the setting confirmation command, the initialization designation command, etc. CPU 012IW120b executes a process such as steps 099IWS001, 099IWS002, 099IWS204, 012IWS802, 012IWS805, 012IWS809, etc.), and at the start of control, the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power is equal to or higher than a predetermined value. At this time, it is specified that only the second control means has restarted, and the second control is started (for example, when the power supply cutoff signal is not input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, the control start is awaited. Without doing so, the log information including the acquired date and time information as the system reset date and time of the second effect control board 012IW12b is stored in the log area. The IW 120b is a part that executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS003).
With such a configuration, it is possible to execute optimum processing according to the situation.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the second control means until the power supply voltage of the power supply to be supplied is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, +8V) from the monitoring means (for example, power supply monitoring). The second control may not be started until the input of the power-off signal from the circuit 099IW127 is stopped (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS002).
With such a configuration, it is possible to execute optimum processing according to the situation.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), a storage means (for example, backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14) capable of holding stored contents even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. The second control means, when starting the control, when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power source has changed from less than a predetermined value to more than the predetermined value (for example, the power supply monitoring circuit at the start of the control). When the power-off signal is input from the 099IW127 and then the input of the power-off signal is stopped), based on the instruction information from the first control means, predetermined information regarding start-up (for example, power-on date and time, start of setting change) Date and time, setting confirmation start date and time, RAM clear date and time, etc. are stored in the storage means (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the processing of step 099IWS205, step 012IWS802, step 012IWS805, step 012IWS809, etc.), At the start of control, when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power is equal to or higher than the predetermined value, the predetermined image is displayed on the display means and the predetermined information is not stored in the storage means (for example, the second When the system reset of the production control board 012IW12b occurs, the initial image is displayed on the image display device 5, but the process of step 099IWS204 is not executed, and the setting change command, the setting confirmation command, the initialization designation command, etc. Since the command at power-on is not received, the log information regarding them may not be stored).
With such a configuration, it is possible to execute optimum processing according to the situation.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above, the storage means includes a first storage means (for example, a first log area for recording log information for a game store) and a second storage means (for example, for a game machine maker). A second log area for recording log information), and the second control means is notified from the monitoring means at the start of control that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply has changed from less than a predetermined value to more than the predetermined value. In this case, the predetermined information related to the activation is stored in the first storage means based on the instruction information from the first control means (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, step 099IWS204, step 012IWS802, step 012IWS805, step 012IWS809). It is possible to specify that only the second control means has been restarted when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than a predetermined value at the start of control. Specific information (for example, log information including the system reset date and time) is stored in the second storage means (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the process of step 099IWS001 N and step 099IWS003). Good.
With such a configuration, it is possible to execute optimum processing according to the situation.

(5) In the gaming machine of the above (4), the second control means carries out a first backup processing for storing information on control in the first storage means (for example, a backup processing for storing log information in the first log area). A second backup process (for example, a backup process in which log information is stored in the second log area) that stores control-related information in the second storage unit can be executed. May be stored in the storage area of No. 2 and the second backup processing may store one piece of information in a plurality of storage areas (for example, refer to FIGS. 8 to 19).
With such a configuration, it is possible to execute optimum processing according to the situation.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic unit 099IW. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is the block diagram which shows the constitution example of the 2nd production control baseplate. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a backup memory board. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a non-reach lost variation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 099IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 099IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 099IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed when a power supply is turned on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is the flowchart which shows a part of production control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution example of the backup process with which multiplicity differs. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of CPU exception event occurrence. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for production control. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an initial result determination table. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start waiting processing. It is an explanatory view showing a pre-game suggestive effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the game suggestion production decision processing. It is the explanation drawing which shows the suggestion production decision table during the game. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production decision processing during the big hit. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit medium suggestion effect determination table, a character effect effect determination table, and a light guide plate effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows ending production processing. It is a flowchart which shows an error alerting|reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an error alerting|reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an error alerting|reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an error alerting|reporting process. It is a flow chart which shows maintenance mode processing. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change time recording process. It is a flow chart which shows current time setting processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining the setting timing of the current time. It is a flowchart which shows a power failure date and time recording process. It is an explanatory view for explaining a record timing of log information of a power failure date and time. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is an explanatory view for explaining a concrete example of a display screen in a maintenance mode. It is an explanatory view for explaining a concrete example of a display screen in a maintenance mode. It is an explanatory view for explaining a concrete example of a display screen in a maintenance mode. It is an explanatory view for explaining a concrete example of a display screen in a maintenance mode. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for gaming machines in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a maintenance history screen in modification 4; FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a maintenance history screen in modification 5;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The change includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variation.

The special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and a special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). The special figure game and the variable display of the decorative design which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of variable displays that are suspended is also referred to as the suspended storage number. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A is the number of LEDs that are turned on. The first reserved memory number is displayed by, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port which is always kept in a fixed open state through which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls are paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole which changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are provided. Is close to the prize winning ball device 6A, and the game ball does not enter the second starting prize hole (the second starting prize hole is also closed). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the tilted position of the movable wing piece (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a special winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening door is a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the on state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When the game balls enter the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, the winning of the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays the normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the universal figure game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of ordinary figure games that are pending to be executed, by the number of LEDs that have been lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so that it can be supplied to a ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and can be tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B which allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotation operation on the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol loss symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol defect". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state to be described later In the case where the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" symbol and a big hit symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" will occur.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

The type of big hit is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc., described later) are prepared, and big hits are made accordingly. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state is finished, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) that shortens the average special figure variation time (period during which the special figure varies) compared to the normal state is executed. In the time saving state, by shortening the average figure change time (the period during which figure changes) compared to the normal state, and improving the probability of "per figure" in the figure game from the normal state, The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which it is likely to be a "big hit" in addition to improving the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The condition that the ending condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting etc.).

The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player, a game state other than a special state such as a time saving state, a probability change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is a "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

After the small hit game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that “small hit” may not be provided as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (notification of the progress status of the game and excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" provided on the image display device 5, as the effects executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the first special figure game. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative pattern which is not stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a big hit combination described later. Is an aspect in which is continuing.

Further, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) being a “big hit” (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the design is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" and the like) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" which is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and the even-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-determination variation pattern (normal pattern). After reaching the reach mode with the non-probabilistic variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is "small hit", the fixed decorative pattern (for example, "" which is a predetermined small hit combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of a mode similar to the small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit" A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach-miss") may be displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach-miss"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss") (Also referred to as) fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the variable display is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit medium effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting medium production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state high accuracy state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling the gaming state, the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state, etc. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed in the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or a game ball passes) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By the transmission of the detection signal, passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), a game status (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening of big winning opening, winning of prize, number of reserved memories, game status), command for designating error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). (Including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The production control CPU 120 displays the execution of production based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control for turning on/off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal, a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for receiving the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. For these commands, the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that recovery from power failure has been performed or is being restored from power failure. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (eg, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, starting information (starting) Data such as information indicating the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the control of the game state, etc. See below).

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). CPU103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41) execution and hold management, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure hold display device 25C is turned on to display the number of ordinary figure hold numbers.

After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of held memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted as described above is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process processing is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the special symbol process process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. In the special symbol normal process, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and the big hit type when the "big hit" is set Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not reach etc.), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process for setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from when the special symbol starts varying. It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). It includes the process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of times of execution of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The big hit opening process is ended.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the jackpot gaming state It includes the process of setting to terminate. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and the probability change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the big hit ending process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening pretreatment is ended.

The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the timing for ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing for opening the small hitting ends.

The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register setting etc. of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in, for example, an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 may be stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative pattern in the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various types The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern by the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command for designating stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect effect processing during the variable display ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving the command designating to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect processing during small hit in step S174 is processing executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Further, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production in response to receiving a command designating to end the small winning game state from the main board 11, for example. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit completion production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit midfield effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid-game production process, the CPU 120 for production control sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the contents of the production in the big hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not have to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, so that the player A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Furthermore, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it also includes the case where one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 099IW)
Next, the characteristic part 099IW will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic unit 099IW. In this characteristic part 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a pass gate 012IW041 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 in place of the pass gate 41 shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 012IW041 is detected by the gate switch 012IW021 (see FIG. 8-2).

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-1, instead of the special variable winning a prize ball device 7 shown in FIG. The variable winning a prize device 012IW007a and the second special variable winning a prize device 012IW007a which constitutes the second big winning a prize mouth are provided. The game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 012IW007a is detected by the first count switch 012IW023a (see FIG. 8-2). In addition, the game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is detected by the second count switch 012IW023b (see FIG. 8-2). Further, a so-called V winning area is provided in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b, and a game ball that has won a V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is a V winning switch 012IW024 (Fig. 8- 2)).

In this example, the game ball that has won the general winning opening 10 is detected by the winning opening switch 012IW010a (see FIG. 8-2).

Further, in this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) inputs the detection signal from the gate switch 012IW021 (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 012IW041), the game ball passes through the passage gate 012IW041. Is controlled to be transmitted to the second effect control board 012IW12b, which specifies a gate passage designation command designating that the character has passed. Further, when the game control microcomputer 100 inputs the detection signal from the winning opening switch 012IW010a (when the gaming ball wins the general winning opening 10), the winning opening that specifies that the general winning opening 10 has won the gaming ball. The control for transmitting the winning designation command to the second effect control board 012IW12b is performed.

Further, in this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 receives, for example, a command from the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board, indicating that the full-filled state of the hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) has been detected. , A control to transmit a full tank detection command indicating that the full state of the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) has been detected to the second effect control board 012IW12b. It should be noted that the payout control microcomputer checks whether or not a detection signal is input from a full tank switch for detecting a full tank state provided on a hit ball supply tray (lower tray), for example. It is possible to detect the full state of the supply plate (lower plate).

In this example, since the passage gate 012IW041 is provided in the right area of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the high base state, the player shoots at the right side of the game area. It is advantageous to perform the operation (so-called right-handed operation). In addition, in this example, the first special variable winning device 012IW007a and the second special variable winning device 012IW007b are provided in the right area of the game area, so that the player who has performed a right-handed operation during the big hit game. Is advantageous.

On the other hand, in this example, when the gaming state is not controlled to the high base state (that is, is controlled to the low base state) and the jackpot is not being played, the player aims at the left side of the gaming area. It is more advantageous to perform the launching operation (so-called left-handed operation) because the game ball can easily win the first starting winning opening.

In this characteristic part 099IW, in the case of a probability variation big hit, for example, a 16 round big hit game is executed, and in the first round to the third round and the fifth round to the 16th round, the first special variable winning device 012IW007a The open state is controlled until a predetermined period (in this example, 29.5 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, and in the fourth round, the second special variable winning The device 012IW007b is controlled to be in an open state until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won. Then, in the fourth round, on the condition that the game ball has won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b, the gaming state is controlled to the probable state after the jackpot game is over. In this example, in the case of a probability variation big hit, winning in the V winning area is a condition, but the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened for a relatively long period (29.5 seconds in this example). Therefore, after the big hit game is finished, it will be controlled to the probability change state.

In this characteristic unit 099IW, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is a special symbol process process (step S25) during the big hit opening process (step S115) or a big hit opening process (step S116). In, when it is detected that the game ball has won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b (specifically, when the ON signal from the V winning switch 012IW024 is input), the game ball is in the V winning area. Control for transmitting a V winning designation command designating that a prize has been won (that a V winning has occurred) to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is performed.

In the case of an uncertain variation big hit (normal big hit), for example, a 16-round big hit game is executed, and in the first round to the third round and the fifth round to the sixteenth round, the first special variable winning device 012IW007a. Is controlled to an open state until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, and in the fourth round, the second special variable The winning device 012IW007b is controlled to be in an open state until an extremely short period (0.1 second in this example) elapses. In this example, in the case of a normal big hit, the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is controlled to be in an open state in the fourth round as in the case of the probability variation big hit, but in an extremely short period (in this example, 0.1 Since it is only released for a second), it is rarely controlled to a probable state after the big hit game is over.

Further, in this characteristic unit 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-2, a first effect control board 012IW12a and a second effect control board 012IW12b are mounted instead of the effect control board 12 shown in FIG.

The first effect control board 012IW12a, which is supplied with power from the power supply board, is equipped with a first effect control CPU 012IW120a, a ROM012IW121a, a RAM012IW122a, a display controller 012IW123, and an I/O012IW125a. The first effect control CPU 012IW120a has a function of receiving a command from the second effect control CPU 012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b and executing an effect based on the received command. Further, in the present example, the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are input to the first effect control CPU 012IW120a mounted on the first effect control board 012IW12a. In this example, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a is set to have a timer interrupt time of 10 ms at the start of power supply, and a timer interrupt is generated every 10 ms to execute various processes.

The second effect control board 012IW12b, which receives power from the power supply board, is provided with a second effect control CPU 012IW120b, a ROM012IW121b, a RAM012IW122b, a random number circuit 012IW124, an I/O012IW125b, a real-time clock 012IW126, and a power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b has a function of executing effect control main processing, and receives and receives effect control commands from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 that is supplied with power from the power supply board. It has a function of executing effect control process processing based on the effect control command (however, it controls the effect means such as the actual image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the stick controller 31A or The control of the part that receives an input from the input means such as the push button 31B is performed on the side of the first effect control CPU 012IW120a). In this example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets 10 ms as a timer interrupt time at the start of power supply, and a timer interrupt is generated every 10 ms to execute various processes.

The second effect control CPU 012IW120b has a function of recording predetermined log information in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Although details will be described later, the backup data memories 099IW 210A to 210D of the backup memory substrate 099IW14 can retain the stored contents even when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b also has a function of recording predetermined log information in a log area provided in the RAM012IW122b using the date and time information output by the real-time clock 012IW126. The RAM012IW122b is backed up by a backup power supply mounted on a power supply board (not shown), and even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, at least the log information recorded in the log area is retained for a predetermined period.

The power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 monitors the power supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b, and when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, +8V), the power supply interruption signal to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. Is output. Specifically, the power-off signal is turned on (low level). In the characteristic part 099IW, the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 is provided on the second effect control board 012IW12b, but the invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, a relay board on the power board or between the power board and the power board. It may be provided above. In this case, the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 may be configured to be able to output a power-off signal to the main board 11, the second effect control board 012IW12b, the first effect control board 012IW12a, and the like. Further, for example, the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 may be provided on the main board 11, and the main board 11 may be configured to be able to output a signal corresponding to the power-off signal to the second effect control board 012IW12b.

In the second effect control board 012IW12b, a power supply circuit mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b generates a power supply of +12V to +3V or +1V. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b can be operated if +3V is supplied (for example, the core operates at +1V and communication with the ROM can be performed at +3V), but the power supply circuit that generates +3V or +1V is , +3 to 5V can be generated if +4 to 5V is supplied, there is a possibility that the power may be operated before being stably supplied.

Therefore, when power is supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b receives the power cutoff signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 (that is, the supplied power supply voltage has a predetermined value). While the voltage is less than (for example, +8V), the control is not started, and when the input of the power-off signal is stopped (that is, the supplied power voltage becomes a predetermined value (for example, +8V) or more, the power is turned on). When stable supply is performed), the control is started. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second effect control CPU 012IW120b from operating before the power is stably supplied.

When the power supply to the game machine is stopped and then the power supply to the game machine is started, the power is supplied when the control of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is started (that is, when the operation is enabled). A power-off signal is input from the monitoring circuit 099IW127, and after a waiting period until the input of the power-off signal is stopped (that is, until the supplied power supply voltage rises and exceeds a predetermined value (for example, +8V)), The control of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is started (corresponding to the processing in the case of Y in step 099IWS001 described later). Further, in this case, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b receives at least the initialization designation command or the command at the time of restoration from the game control microcomputer 100.

On the other hand, if a system reset or the like of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs, it does not mean that the power supply of the gaming machine itself has stopped, but the control of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b starts (that is, becomes operable). Power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 is not input (that is, the power supply voltage to be supplied has already risen, and therefore exceeds a predetermined value (for example, +8V)), the standby period Without passing, control of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is started (corresponding to the processing in the case of N in step 099IWS001 described later). Further, in this case, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not transmit the power-on command such as the initialization designation command or the restoration command from the game control microcomputer 100.

Therefore, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, whether the power failure of the gaming machine itself occurs due to the presence or absence of the waiting period at the start of control (that is, when the operation is enabled), the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, etc. Can be identified. Specifically, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines that the power supply voltage of the power supply to be supplied has changed from less than a predetermined value to more than a predetermined value when there is a waiting period at the start of control (that is, after the operation is enabled. Is notified by the state of the power-off signal from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127), it can be specified that the power of the gaming machine itself has been cut. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b indicates from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 that the power supply voltage of the power supply to be supplied has already reached a predetermined value or more when there is no waiting period at the start of control (that is, when the operation is enabled. When notified by the state of the power-off signal), it can be specified that the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has occurred. Hereinafter, expressions such as power interruption of the gaming machine itself and restart of the gaming machine itself are used, but this means that at least the main board 11 and the effect control board (for example, the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b) are turned on. It is a concept that includes disconnection and restart.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, the second effect control board 012IW12b is mutually connected to the backup memory board 099IW14. The backup memory board 099IW14 is a board for storing backup data that is provided separately from the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b. The writing process and the reading process are executed. In the backup data writing process, the backup data is written and stored in the backup data memory. In the backup data reading process, the backup data stored in the backup data memory is read and transmitted to the second effect control board 012IW12b or the like.

FIG. 8-3 shows a configuration example of the second effect control board 012IW12b. Of the electronic parts such as the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, the ROM012IW121b, and the RAM012IW122b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b, some or all of the electronic parts can be detached by inserting/removing connector pins into/from the connector socket. The other components may be mounted so as to be mountable by soldering or the like. On the second effect control board 012IW12b, a connector 099IW150, a connector 099IW151, a connector 099IW154 and a connector 099IW156 are mounted together with these electronic components. The second effect control board 012IW12b includes a second effect control CPU 012IW120b, electronic components such as ROM 012IW121b, RAM 012IW122b, and a plurality of electronic components such as a serial communication circuit 099IW137.

The serial communication circuit 099IW137 is a circuit capable of transmitting/receiving communication data to/from various boards and circuits other than the second effect control board 012IW12b by a serial communication method. The serial communication circuit 099IW137 may be capable of transmitting and receiving communication data compatible with a plurality of types of serial communication standards such as UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter), SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface), and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit). The serial communication circuit 099IW137 may include a plurality of communication processing units including a receiving unit, a transmitting unit, a communication control unit, a serial communication data register, a serial status register, a serial control register, and the like. UART is an asynchronous serial communication standard, and transfers communication data using start bits and stop bits. In this case, the clock signal line is unnecessary, but the communication speed (baud rate) is relatively low. SPI and I2C are clock synchronous serial communication standards, and transfer communication data using a clock signal. In this case, a clock signal line is required, but the communication speed (baud rate) is relatively high. In the case of SPI, signal lines corresponding to the clock signal, the transmission data signal, the reception data signal, and the slave selection signal are provided. In the case of I2C, signal lines corresponding to the clock signal and the data signal are provided. The plurality of communication processing units included in the serial communication circuit 099IW137 may have different hardware configurations according to the plurality of types of serial communication standards.

The connector 099IW150, the connector 099IW151, the connector 099IW154, and the connector 099IW156 are configured by using, for example, receptacles, and have a configuration of a wiring connection device capable of detachably connecting various signal wirings. The connector 099IW150, the connector 099IW151, the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW156 enable various signals to be output via different paths such as different wiring patterns in the second effect control board 012IW12b. The connector 099IW150 is a main board wiring connector port to which main board wiring electrically connected to the main board 11 can be connected. The connector 099IW151 is a power supply wiring connector port to which a power supply wiring electrically connected to a power supply unit such as a power supply board can be connected. The connector 099IW154 is a connector port for backup wiring to which a backup wiring electrically connected to a backup unit such as the backup memory board 099IW14 can be connected. The connector 099IW156 is a connector port for inspection wiring to which inspection wiring electrically connected to an information processing device for inspection, test, or development (personal computer or the like) can be connected. The information processing device for inspection may be any device that functions as an inspection device for the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a specific software program, for example. Thus, the connector 099IW156 is an electronic component used as a connection member to which the inspection device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is connected.

The connector 099IW156 enables connection of inspection wiring at the trial production stage, the development stage, or the production stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the second production control CPU 012IW120b is shipped according to a test command different from the production control command. The previous inspection process may be made executable. The inspection process before shipment is performed, for example, before the completion of the software program during trial manufacture or development, and the internal parameters and input/output signals when the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes a part or all of the program code, It may include verifiable processing. The verification environment in which the inspection process is executed before shipment may be, for example, an execution environment corresponding to a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the gaming machine installation island, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 alone is a personal computer. It may be an execution environment in which the operating status can be confirmed by connecting to an information processing device such as. Further, the connector 099IW156, for example, can be connected to the inspection wiring at the recovery stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that the backup data reading process can be executed according to a test command different from the production control command. Good. Alternatively, the connector 099IW156 may be removed, for example, at the shipping stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, the connector 099IW156 is mounted only on a predetermined model such as a demo or a test other than the model in which the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the game hall, and is a mass-produced machine installed in the game hall (mass machine). It may not be mounted. The land on which the connector 099IW156 can be mounted may be formed on the substrate surface of the second effect control substrate 012IW12b. When the connector 099IW156 is removed or not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land where the connector 099IW156 is not mounted may be soldered. The soldering process is a process of applying solder to the exposed portion of the copper foil pattern, and may be performed using, for example, a cream solder printing machine or may be performed by any method that does not use the cream solder printing machine. .. Depending on whether the connector 099IW156 is mounted or not, the soldering process may be performed in the same process, or the soldering process may be performed in different processes. When the soldering process in the same process is performed, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of patterns of metal masks used in a cream solder printing machine for applying solder to the lands, so that it is possible to prevent an increase in cost required to prepare the substrate. By soldering unmounted lands on which electronic parts such as the connector 099IW156 are not mounted, the copper foil pattern is prevented from being oxidized, and the failure such as the disconnection due to the corrosion of the wiring pattern is prevented, and the quality of the board is appropriately maintained. be able to.

When the electronic component such as the connector 099IW156 is not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land on which the electronic component is not mounted is not limited to the one that is soldered and coated. For example, a resist that is an insulating coating is applied. It may be coated. In this way, by covering the land on which electronic components are not mounted by any method, it is possible to prevent oxidation of the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern, and maintain the board quality appropriately. I wish I could. On the other hand, the land on which the electronic component is not mounted may not be covered by soldering or the like. For example, when the land is soldered, solder as a conductor may adhere to the copper foil pattern, which may cause an unintended short circuit or current path in the wiring pattern. Therefore, the land on which electronic components are not mounted does not undergo soldering to prevent solder from adhering to the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as short circuit of the wiring pattern and changes in the current path, and ensure proper board quality. Can be maintained. By performing the insulating film treatment instead of the solder treatment, it is possible to prevent the adhesion of the solder to the copper foil pattern, prevent the defects such as the short circuit of the wiring pattern and the change of the current path, and appropriately maintain the quality of the substrate. You may do it.

FIG. 8-4(A) shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the backup memory substrate 099IW14. The backup memory board 099IW14 is provided with a memory controller 099IW200, an RTC099IW201, a serial communication circuit 099IW202, an inspection connection section 099IW203, backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D, and a connector 099IW220. As described above, the backup memory substrate 099IW14 is provided with the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D as a plurality of backup data storage units. The memory controller 099IW200 can execute backup data write processing and read processing according to the backup control signal from the second effect control board 012IW12b. The RTC099IW201 can measure the current date and time, and can supply date and time information including date information and time information to the memory controller 099IW200. The serial communication circuit 099IW202 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data to and from the second effect control board 012IW12b by a serial communication method. The serial communication circuit 099IW202 only needs to be capable of transmitting and receiving communication data corresponding to a specific serial communication standard such as SPI. The serial communication circuit 099IW202 should just be equipped with the communication processing part of the hardware structure corresponding to such a specific serial communication standard. The inspection connecting portion 099IW203 may be formed as a specific conductor portion including a terminal capable of inputting and outputting an inspection signal, such as a test point. When the inspection connection unit 099IW203 is a test point, a test probe is brought into contact with the inspection connection unit 099IW203, and the inspection signal is transmitted between the inspection device and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b. It is only necessary to be able to perform input/output and read backup data. The inspection connection unit 099IW203 is an inspection signal between the inspection device and the memory controller 099IW200 of the backup memory board 099IW14 or the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D without the intervention of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b. It is also possible to be able to input/output data, read backup data, and the like. In this way, the inspection connection unit 099IW203 can provide an interface for performing data communication with the inspection device, which is an external device, in the backup memory board 099IW14.

The backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D may be partially or entirely configured by using a non-volatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) (Ferroelectric RAM), or a part or all of them are battery-equipped SRAM (Static RAM). May be used. The backup data memories 099IW 210A to 210D may be partially or entirely configured by using a flash memory such as a NAND-ROM, an EEPROM, or an HDD (Hard Disk Drive). A non-volatile ferroelectric memory called FRAM (registered trademark) has a memory cell using a ferroelectric film as a capacitor insulating film, and a memory written in the memory cell even when the operating power supply is turned off. No data is lost. The configuration using FRAM (registered trademark) does not require a battery backup for holding data, and has high-speed writing, high rewriting frequency, and low power consumption as compared with a nonvolatile memory such as a flash memory, an EEPROM, or an HDD. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in installation area, simplify the device configuration, improve operation efficiency, and appropriately store and save backup data. Further, it is not necessary to dispose of the battery, it is possible to prevent the stored contents from being lost due to the replacement of the battery, and it is possible to properly store and save the backup data. The backup data memories 099IW 210A to 210D may be backed up by a backup power supply mounted on the power supply board. In this way, the backup data memories 099IW 210A to 210D can retain the stored contents even when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. The backup data memories 099IW 210A to 210D may be able to retain the stored contents without using a backup power source, for example, when part or all of them are configured using FRAM (registered trademark). Alternatively, the backup data memories 099IW 210A to 210B may be able to hold the stored contents by using a backup power supply, for example, when a part or all of the backup data memories are configured using SRAM with a battery.

The backup memory board 099IW14 stores and stores various log information in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D by using the date and time information output from the RTC099IW201. The memory controller 099IW200 can execute a writing process or a reading process of the stored data in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D in accordance with an instruction or an instruction sent from the second effect control CPU 012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b. .. In this case, by executing a writing process and a reading process of stored data indicating log information including date and time information, an operation history, a setting history, and a history of a plurality of electronic components used for a game or effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It suffices if the error history can be stored so that it can be verified afterwards.

FIG. 8-4(B) shows a configuration example for connecting the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14. The second effect control board 012IW12b includes a connector 099IW154 that can be attached to and detached from the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14. The backup memory board 099IW14 includes a connector 099IW220 that is detachable from the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b. By coupling the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW220, the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 can be physically and electrically connected. The connector 099IW154 provided on the second effect control board 012IW12b includes terminals TM01 to TM06. The connector 099IW220 provided on the backup memory board 099IW14 includes terminals TM11 to TM16. The terminals TM01 to TM06 included in the connector 099IW154 and the terminals TM11 to TM16 included in the connector 099IW220 have corresponding terminals (for example, the terminal TM01 and the terminal TM11) physically and electrically when the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW220 are coupled. It is sufficient if it is connected to.

The terminal TM01 provided in the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b can provide a specific voltage such as VD1. The terminal TM02 provided in the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b can receive the VD1 of the specific voltage used for confirming the connection with the backup memory board 099IW14. For example, the specific voltage VD1 output from the terminal TM01 included in the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b is supplied to the terminal TM11 included in the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14. The terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 099IW220 may be short-circuited on the backup memory board 099IW14. Therefore, when the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW220 are coupled to each other, from the terminal TM12 of the connector 099IW220 in the backup memory board 099IW14 to the terminal TM02 of the connector 099IW154 in the second effect control board 012IW12b, the voltage corresponding to VD1. Is supplied. On the other hand, when the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW220 are not connected to each other and are not connected, the voltage is not supplied to the terminal TM02 of the connector 099IW154 in the second effect control board 012IW12b.

In the second effect control board 012IW12b, the effect control CPU 012IW120b determines the voltage value at the terminal TM02 of the connector 099IW154 in order to confirm the connection state with the backup memory board 099IW14. In this case, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a high voltage value corresponding to VD1, it can be determined that the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 are connected (connected state). On the other hand, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a low voltage value corresponding to the voltage non-supply, it is determined that the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 are not connected (unconnected state). it can. In this way, the connection state between the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 may be confirmed based on the voltage at the terminal TM02 which is the connection confirmation member. The connection state is not limited to the one that confirms the connection state based on the terminal voltage, but may be the one that confirms the connection state based on the input state of the specific signal, for example. Alternatively, the connection state may be confirmed by using a switch or a sensor as a connection confirmation member.

The terminals TM03 to TM06 included in the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b are wired and connected to the serial communication circuit 099IW137 included in the second effect control board 012IW12b. The terminals TM13 and TM14 provided in the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14 are wired and connected to the serial communication circuit 099IW202. Therefore, the wirings connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 099IW154 and the terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 099IW220 are connected to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b and the backup memory substrate 099IW14 via the serial communication circuit 099IW137 and the serial communication circuit 099IW202. An electrical connection is provided between the backup data memories 099IW 210A to 210D so that the stored data can be transferred. The terminals TM15 and TM16 included in the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14 are wired and connected to the inspection connecting portion 099IW203. Thus, the wiring connected to the terminals TM05 and TM06 of the connector 099IW154 and the terminals TM15 and TM16 of the connector 099IW220 is connected to the inspection connection portion of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b and the backup memory board 099IW14 via the serial communication circuit 099IW137. An electrical connection is provided with the 099IW 203 so that inspection signals can be transmitted and received and stored data can be transferred.

The backup memory board 099IW14 is configured to be attachable to and detachable from the second effect control board 012IW12b. Thus, for example, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that does not use the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D, the backup memory board 099IW14 can be removed, and the flexibility of the device configuration is increased and the manufacturing cost is increased. Can be prevented. Further, since the backup memory substrate 099IW14 can be removed and the stored data can be read and analyzed, the work load of inspecting the stored data can be reduced. The real-time clock 012IW126 provided on the second effect control board 012IW12b may provide the current time for timing adjustment for executing an effect in which a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 are interlocked with each other, and it is relatively accurate. Things are needed. On the other hand, the RTC099IW201 of the backup memory board 099IW14 needs only to be able to specify the context of the storage processing executed for the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D, so that the RTC099IW201 should be of relatively low precision and sufficiently satisfy the application. You can As described above, the RTC099IW201 of the backup memory substrate 099IW14 only needs to have a relatively low accuracy, and thus an increase in manufacturing cost can be prevented. The configuration and function of the backup memory board 099IW14 may be configured to be included in the second effect control board 012IW12b. For example, the configurations and functions of the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D may be realized by the RAM012IW122b. Even in this case, for example, a wiring pattern in the second effect control board 012IW12b, or a switch or a sensor may be used as a connection confirmation member to confirm the connection state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-5, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 012IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board constituting a gaming board surface. (Gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 012IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, in the gaming machine frame 012IW003, a glass door frame 012IW003a having a glass window is provided between a door open position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 012IW003 and a door closed position that closes the front surface of the gaming machine frame 012IW003. The glass door frame 012IW003a is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 012IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In addition, the game machine frame 012IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. The door frame 012IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 012IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, the main board 11 is provided with a setting key 012IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later.

The setting switching main body provided with an operation unit such as the setting key 012IW051 that can be operated by the player is housed in the substrate case 012IW201 together with the main substrate 11, and the setting key 012IW051 does not require opening the substrate case 012IW201. The substrate case 012IW201 is exposed to the back side through an opening formed on the right side of the back side so that it can be operated.

Since the board case 012IW201 having the setting key 012IW051 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is impossible to operate from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The operation can be performed by opening the game machine frame 3 using the door key. Further, since the setting key 012IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the store clerk or the like in the game arcade, only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. The setting key 012IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation described later. In the characteristic part 099IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used in combination.

In addition, a display monitor 012IW029 and a display changeover switch 012IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 012IW029 are arranged in the substrate case 012IW201. The display monitor 012IW029 and the display change-over switch 012IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 012IW201. That is, the display monitor 012IW029 and the display changeover switch 012IW030 are arranged in front of the main case 11 of the board case 012IW201 when the main board 11 is viewed. The main board 11 is invisible when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when viewing the main board 11 refers to the back surface side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 012IW003 opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 012IW051 in the characteristic part 099IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be operated. There is a possibility that the setting key 012IW051 is operated from the inside of the installed gaming island. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 099IW, as shown in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6, the right end portion of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 is provided at the right end portion of the outer frame 012IW001a when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. A security cover 012IW500A is attached to cover the back side from the back side. The security cover 012IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 012IW500Aa facing the front-rear direction and a long piece 012IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 012IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , And is made of a transparent plate-shaped synthetic resin material. The vertical dimension of the short piece 012IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 012IW201. The security cover 012IW500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 012IW001a via the front end of the short piece 012IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 8-5, the long piece 012IW500Ab contacts (or approaches) the right part of the board case 012IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. By doing so, the right side of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 012IW051 becomes inoperable by the long piece 012IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-6, in the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the setting key 012IW051 moves together with the gaming machine frame 012IW003 and moves away from the long piece 012IW500Ab, thereby causing the long piece. When the covered state of 012IW500Ab is released, the state becomes operable.

In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic unit 099IW is maintained in a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted by the security cover 012IW500A when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. On the other hand, in the state in which the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the above-mentioned restriction state by the security cover 012IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is permitted.

Since the board case 012IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 012IW051 when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. It is impossible to change the set value by operating the setting key 012IW051 unless the game machine frame 012IW003 is opened by the door key or the like.

However, in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) of the gaming hall, even if the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a gaming device such as a card unit or the like, which is installed between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate, to enter the setting key 012IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since there is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as changing the setting value is performed by operating the, the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted by the security cover 012IW500A when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. By maintaining the restricted state as described above, it is possible to suitably suppress the above fraudulent acts.

Even in a restricted state in which the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 is covered by the security cover 012IW500A, it is accommodated in the substrate case 012IW201 through the transparent security cover 012IW500A. Since it is possible to see through the main board 11 and the like on which it is mounted, it is possible to easily check the mounting surface on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted on the main board 11 and the situation such as a seal.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

In the feature part 099IW, on the main substrate 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the general figure display result determining Numerical value data indicating each of the random number value MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol. A fluctuation pattern table for storing a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 8-7(B), and FIG. -7 (C) display result determination table (setting value 3), the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), small hit variation pattern determination table ( (Not shown), a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9, a public figure display result determination table (not shown), a public figure variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 099IW has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the jackpot (ball-out rate) is changed. .. The set value is made up of three stages of 1 to 3, and 1 is the lowest payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, 3 the higher the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3, the advantage gradually increases. In the feature part 099IW, the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
8-7(A) to 8(C) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, with respect to each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

As shown in FIG. 8-7(A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is a variable display target. If the set values are “2” and “3”, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 in the non-probable variation, 1/32 in the probable variation). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". It is supposed to do. Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). To do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hit, so that the first special symbol is small with a higher probability (1/2) than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display. It is supposed to win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1". You win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/300 when uncertain change, 1/30 when uncertain change) than in some cases. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is supposed to do. Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability (1/300 when non-probable change, 1/30 when probable change) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a higher probability that the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value The winning probability is small, with the same probability (1/2) as when "1" or "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280 in non-probability change, 1/28 in probability change) than in the case of "2". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is supposed to do. Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is the target of variable display, with the same probability (1/280 when non-probable variation, 1/28 when probable variation) To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a higher probability that the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value The small win is achieved with the same probability (1/2) as when "1" or "2".

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 8-7(A) to (C). When the hit determination value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when the MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 8-7(A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) to (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit game state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the case where the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value is shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, similarly to the winning probability of the big hit, the winning probability of the small hit may increase as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be the same as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value "1" is set to 1/100, the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value "2" is designed to be 1/93.75, You may set so that the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “3” may be 1/87.5.

Further, in a gaming machine in which no small hit is provided, the configuration shown by the feature part 099IW may be applied.

Further, in the characteristic part 099IW, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8C to determine whether to make a big hit or a small hit. The big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the judgment of the big hit is in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variation special figure designation buffer. The common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using separate tables for the first and second variation special diagram designation buffers.

Further, in the characteristic part 099IW, the case where the degree of advantage increases in the order of the set value “1”<the set value “2”<the set value “3” is shown, for example, the order of the degree of advantage according to the gaming state. May be changed. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a high probability/high base state, maintain the high probability/high base state until the next big hit occurs, and to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this case, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-7, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2 and a prize ball is likely to be obtained. Therefore, in a specific game state (high probability/high base state in this example), unlike other game states, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability/high base state is easy to continue). The value “1” may be set to have the highest advantage.

Further, for example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state ends based on the fact that the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (the probability variation end number) after being controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state), the same probability variation is applied. If it is the number of terminations, the probability change continuation rate (rate of continuous vacation) may be increased in the order of set value “1”<set value “2”<set value “3”.

In addition, in the characteristic part 099IW, three set values of 1 to 3 are provided as set values which can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIG. 8-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, when the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), A common jackpot type determination table is used when the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the proportion of which jackpot type is determined is different.

The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination, the jackpot type among jackpot type A to jackpot type C. It is a table that is referred to when deciding on either.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(A), the determination value corresponding to the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination is assigned for each set value, but for simplification of description, assignment is made. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. In other words, the ratio of which of the big hit type A to the big hit type C is determined for each set value is shown. It should be noted that the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-10, which will be described later, are actually assigned the determination value corresponding to the random number. For simplification, the percentage of the assigned decision value is shown.

As shown in FIG. 8-8(A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the setting value is “1”, the percentage determined as the jackpot type C is high, and when the setting value is “2”, The determination value is assigned such that when the percentage determined as the jackpot type B is high and the setting value is “3”, the percentage determined as the jackpot type A is high.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 099IW will be described with reference to FIG. 8-8(B). In the feature portion 099IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period in which the big hit opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the big hit symbols are stopped and displayed on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b side. After that, the fanfare production as a production operation for notifying the start of the big hit game state is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period in which the big hit post-processing in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the big winning opening is opened on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b. Is a period during which an interval effect as an effect operation for notifying the start of the next round is executed after the end of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period in which the jackpot end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and notifies the end of the jackpot game state on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b side. This is a period in which the ending effect as the effect operation to be performed is executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-8(B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the jackpot type A, the longest in the jackpot type B, and the longest in the jackpot type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the feature part 099IW, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of determination as the big hit type C is high, and thus the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the setting value is “3”, the percentage of determination as the big hit type A is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

In the feature part 099IW, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set value “1”<“2”<“3”, but at the same time, the set value is “1”. It is also configured such that the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period becomes longer in the order of “<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is set high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the average period of the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and gambling Can be prevented from becoming too high.

In this feature section 099IW, during the big hit game, a big hit medium suggestive effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value can be executed, but this big hit medium suggestive effect is performed in the fanfare period, interval period and ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fun of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased. Further, by directing the interest of the player to the suggestive effect during the big hit, it is possible to make the duration of each period less noticeable.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, common effects may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is not easily noticed by the players is commonly executed.

In addition, in the feature part 099IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each big hit type, and the percentage of which big hit type is determined for each set value is different, so that the big hit When the winning probability (ball output rate) is set high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set to be longer, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, any one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the judgment values are set such that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which a relatively long period is set are selected in the descending order of the big hit type A<B<C. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be made longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

In this characteristic part 099IW, in any of the big hit type A to the big hit type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the big hit game state are a predetermined number of times (100 times in this characteristic part 099IW). The figure game ends, or the big hit game state is entered before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time saving control and probability variation control may be different for each big hit type. May be, in the case of a particular big hit type, high-precision control and time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state, continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state It may be done. In the case of such a specific big hit type, a big hit game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, that is, a so-called condominium state. In the feature part 099IW, the jackpot rate is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability change continues for each set value. The rate (rate of consecutive holidays) may be different.

In addition, in the feature section 099IW, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the big hit type A to the big hit type C (for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence/absence of time saving control and probability variation control, the number of times of control, etc.), and the fanfare period and interval. It is configured so that the average period of the period and the ending period are different, for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence or absence of time saving control and probability variation control, and the number of controls are different for each big hit type, and the advantage is different You may do it. In this case, the effects during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

In the characteristic part 099IW, the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C at different rates according to the set value set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types A, the jackpot types B, and the jackpot types C that cannot be determined or There may be more than one. That is, when the jackpot type determination rate differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100%. Included in deciding on a percentage.

Further, in the characteristic part 099IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period differ depending on the type of jackpot is shown, but the invention is not limited to such a mode, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are not limited to the type of jackpot. The period may be different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period according to the set value may be uniformly determined depending on which of the set values “1” to “3”. Further, for example, depending on which one of the set values “1” to “3” is set, a lottery process is performed with a selection probability according to the set value, and a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period are determined. You may.

In this way, in the characteristic part 099IW, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different according to the set value that is set, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. ..

In addition, in the feature part 099IW, the big hit type is determined by using MR2 which is a random number value for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determination.

Further, in the feature part 099IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase, and the big hit type C as the big hit type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

Further, in the present characteristic part 099IW, the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the one, the game property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game characteristic of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the probability of a big hit in the normal state is 1/200, and a game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the big hit game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the big hit game to a probable state based on passing a predetermined count switch, the percentage of game balls passing through the count switch during the big hit game varies depending on the big hit type If the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50. It may be a game property (so-called 1 type/2 types mixed type) in which a game ball is controlled to a big hit game state based on a game ball passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as the playability, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. It is also possible to provide a setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

Further, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time it is played, and when the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball is It may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a positive change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch).

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIG. 8-8(C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. 8-8(C), in the feature part 099IW, small hit types A to C are provided as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 8-8(C), in this feature portion 099IW, the determination ratios of the small hit types A to C are the same regardless of which of the setting values is “1” to “3”.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, regardless of which of the small hit types A to C, the opening period and the number of times of opening the special winning opening during the small hit game are the same, and the advantage degree in the game is the same. ..

(Variation pattern determination table)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variation display result "big hit" and the variation display result "small hit" The small hitting variation pattern determination table used when is predetermined, and the loss variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variation display result "miss" are prepared in advance. ..

(Loss variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram of a loss variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic part 099IW, a period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) from when the setting is changed at power-on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) and other periods ( In the following, it is also configured to use different loss variation pattern determination tables for non-special period).

Specifically, in the special period, the variation pattern is determined using the first lost variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9(A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 8-9(B). The variation pattern is determined using the second lost variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic part 099IW, the period from the time the setting is changed when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is a special period, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, for example, the period until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as the special period regardless of whether the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, by using the real-time clock 012IW126 or the like, a special period may be set in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). Also, the period until the first big hit occurs may be a special period.

The first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-9 (A) and (B) are both normal reach loss and super reach loss in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3”. The determination value is assigned such that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of the normal reach or the super reach differs depending on the set value, so that the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the normal reach or the super reach is executed.

Further, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9(A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9(B), and further has a set value. The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between the two becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of performing normal reach than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), and thus the motivation for playing the game in the special period. Can be given, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Note that, for example, fluctuation patterns involving super-reach (or specific fluctuation patterns among them) are determined at the same rate regardless of the difference in set values (or the difference between special periods and non-special periods). You may do it. By doing so, the execution ratio differs only in a specific variation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the setting value, and the setting value is suggested by the frequency with which the specific variation pattern is executed. become. In addition, conversely, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

Further, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-9 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss depending on the set value, except for non-reach loss. The determination values are assigned so that the ratios (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) are different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9(A), the ratio of normal reach loss becomes significantly higher in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3” (in this example, Then, the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9(B) shows the normal reach loss in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3”. Is slightly increased (in this example, increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. Further, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

In the feature part 099IW, setting suggestive effects can be executed at different rates depending on the set value. This is because the execution rates of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different according to the set value. The concept includes that the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different, and the execution ratios of only the normal reach loss are different according to the set value.

In the feature unit 099IW, the common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-9 (A) and (B) is used. Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. Further, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 to perform variable display of decorative patterns. Note that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

Not limited to the example of the feature part 099IW, for example, a special variation pattern suggesting a set value (for example, a variation pattern in which the variation display of the decorative pattern is different from the normal, and the set value is 1 or 2) May be selected), so that the special variation pattern can be selected only during the special period. With such a structure as well, it is possible to provide an incentive to play a game during a special period, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Non-reach loss variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 8-10 is an explanatory diagram of a non-reach-miss variation pattern determination table. In the feature part 099IW, a plurality of types of non-reach-miss variation patterns having different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach-loss variation, the non-reach-loss variation A to C is further determined. Is configured. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the non-reachable loss A to C, the normal reachable loss, and the super reachable loss are included in the lossy variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 so as to include the non-reachable loss A to C. It may be configured to determine whether or not.

As shown in FIG. 8-10, in the non-reach-miss variation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", the rate of determination of non-reach-miss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is "2". If the set value is “3”, the rate determined as non-reach loss B (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Is assigned a judgment value.

In the feature unit 099IW, when the set value is “1”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so the variation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, and therefore the variation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average variation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

In the feature part 099IW, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set value “1”<“2”<“3”, but at the same time, the set value is “1”. It is also configured such that the average variation time becomes longer in the order of “<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling probability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

In the feature part 099IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different by changing the ratio of the non-reach loses A to C having the different fluctuation times according to the set value. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) so that the variation time is different, and the selection ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when a plurality of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the variation time is different, the time of the decorative pattern swaying display or the high-speed variation display is made different, and the effect etc. It is desirable that there be no difference in how they look.

In addition, in the characteristic part 099IW, the average variation time is configured to be different depending on the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the fixed decorative pattern (final decoration) The period in which the stop pattern) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is high, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the fixed decorative design (final stop design) is stopped and displayed, that is, to delay the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

In addition, in the feature part 099IW, the variation time is set for each of the non-reach loses A to C, and the proportion of which of the non-reach loses A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the big hit is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. However, the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration but is set for each set value. The fixed time may be fixed, and the variation time may be longer when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is higher.

In this characteristic part 099IW, a variation pattern for shortening that the variation time is shorter than other variation patterns is provided. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time of 1.5 seconds) is provided that is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time of 9 seconds). Then, this shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is in a state close to the upper limit, this state is canceled and variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is intended. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Therefore, in the characteristic unit 099IW, the shortening fluctuation pattern used when the number of reserved memories is equal to or larger than the predetermined number has a common fluctuation time regardless of the set value. Note that, regardless of the configuration of the feature part 099IW, the variation time patterns for shortening used when the number of reserved memories is equal to or larger than the predetermined number may also be varied according to the set value.

(Setting confirmation process, setting change process)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature part 099IW will be described. 8-11 to 8-13 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 099IW. It should be noted that the processing of steps IWS001 and S002 in the feature unit 099IW is the same as the processing of steps S1 and S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 sets the time until the effect control means (specifically, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A production control means start waiting timer for measurement is set (step 012IWS003). In this case, the effect control means start waiting timer is set to a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine until the first effect control CPU 012IW120a and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b are activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 012IWS004), and confirms whether the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after subtraction is 0 (step 012IWS005). If the value of the effect control means start waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 012IWS004 and the processes of steps 012IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the production control means start waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 012IWS006.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS003 to S005, the processing after step 012IWS006 is executed after waiting until the first effect control CPU 012IW120a and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b are activated, and the setting value change and confirmation, the RAM. Initialization and recovery processing are performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization designation command, and a command for restoration described later are transmitted before the first effect control CPU 012IW120a and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b are activated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the command from being missed.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the RAM clear flag indicating that the clear switch has been pressed when the power to the gaming machine was turned on (step 012IWS006).

In this example, the RAM clear flag is not cleared in the power-off process (see step 012IWS031) described later, but the RAM clear flag is cleared once by step 012IWS006 when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and then the clear switch is set. If so, the RAM clear flag is newly set (see steps 012IWS016 and S022), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the RAM clear flag is also cleared when the power-off process is executed, and then the clear switch is set when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the RAM clear flag is newly set. Good.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as step S4 (step 012IWS007). Specifically, in step 012IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the data check of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) by the same process as step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 012IWS008). In step 012IWS008, for example, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 012IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 012IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 012IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values “1” to “3”. (Step 012IWS009). If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the set values “1” to “3”, the process proceeds to step 012IWS011.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (N in step 012IWS008) or the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the setting values “1” to “3” (Y in step 012IWS009). The CPU 103 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS010). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

When the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the set values “1” to “3” (N in step 012IWS009), the CPU 103 is executing the setting change process for changing the set value. It is confirmed whether or not the setting change flag indicating that is set (step 012IWS011). If the setting change flag is set (step 012IWS011; Yes), that is, if the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted due to power failure or the like during the change of the set value, the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

In step 012IWS012, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is on (step 012IWS012). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS013). If the setting key 012IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 012IWS014). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 012IWS015).

In this example, the RAM clear processing includes a RAM clear 1 processing (see step 012IWS051) and a RAM clear 2 processing (see step 012IWS015) executed when a RAM abnormality occurs.

In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the areas other than the area for storing performance display information such as the serial ratio, the combination ratio, and the base and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the serial ratio and Information for performance display such as winning ratio, base, etc., and setting value information are retained without being cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 1 process is referred to as a clear storage area 1.

In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the storage area of the RAM 102 other than the area for storing the performance display information such as the serial ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is cleared, and the performance ratio such as the serial ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is displayed. Information is retained without being cleared. Further, in the RAM clear 2 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is referred to as a clear storage area 2. Therefore, in this example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 2 processing is larger than the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 1 processing.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 012IWS016), and proceeds to step 012IWS025. The RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is off (N in step 012IWS012), the setting key 012IW051 is off (N in step 012IWS013), or the output signal from the clear switch is off ( In N of step 012IWS014, CPU103 performs control which transmits a setting value abnormality error command to CPU012IW120b for 2nd effect control (step 012IWS017).

Next, the CPU 103 shifts to the loop processing of steps 012IWS018 to S020. In the loop process, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a wait time of 4 ms (step 012IWS018). When the wait time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 shifts to step 012IWS019 and displays a predetermined error (step 012IWS019). For example, the CPU 103 controls the display monitor 012IW029 to display a display indicating that a RAM error has occurred (for example, a display of "E"). Further, the CPU 103 controls the external output of the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board (step 012IWS020). Then, the processing from step 012IWS018 is repeatedly executed.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS007 to S020, in the feature unit 099IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in step 012IWS007, S008, Y in step 012IWS009), power failure or the like occurs during setting change. In the case (Y in step 012IWS011), the RAM is cleared and the set value after step 012IWS025 is set on condition that the setting key 012IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on while the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened. Can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened and the setting key 012IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and gaming control does not proceed.

If the setting change flag is not set (step 012IWS011; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 012IWS021). If the output signal from the clear switch is ON, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 012IWS022).

In this example, by executing the processing of step 012IWS022 and step 012IWS016, the RAM clear flag is set when the clear switch is first turned on when the game machine is powered on. Then, after that, before the timer interrupt is set and the timer interrupt process (game control process) is started, there are multiple situations where it is confirmed whether or not the clear switch ON is detected when the power is turned on. However, it is determined whether the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on by checking whether or not the RAM clear flag is set instead of directly checking the state of the clear switch. (See steps 012IWS025, S034, S048).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is ON (step 012IWS023). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS024). If the setting key 012IW051 is on, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS025). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the CPU 103 controls to send a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value is executed to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (step 012IWS026). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 controls to send a setting change command indicating execution of the setting change process for changing the setting value to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b ( Step 012IWS027). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (step 012IWS028). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (that is, if an abnormality of the RAM 102 is detected), the CPU 103 causes the setting value determination buffer (a storage area provided in the RAM 102 for storing the current setting value). The set value is set to "1" (step 012IWS029). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030. At this time, the CPU 103 resets the RAM abnormality flag.

In addition, when the setting confirmation command and the setting change command are received, the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b perform control for notifying that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed (for example, , A predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner). In this case, when the operation buttons for production such as the push button 31B are pressed on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b side, "maintenance mode" is displayed and the mode is changed to the maintenance mode. It may be configured to do so. The "maintenance mode" is, for example, the date and time setting of the real-time clock 012IW126, the history of various error occurrences (record of when and what kind of error occurred), and the setting change history (when the set value was changed or after the changed value). This is a mode in which you can check the record of the set value of. When the setting key 012IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also completed.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a wait time of 4 ms (step 012IWS030). Then, when the wait time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 shifts to step 012IWS031 and executes power-off processing (step 012IWS031). In the power-off process of step 012IWS031, the CPU 103 executes a process of detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not it is in the ON state). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off process, when the CPU 103 detects that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 103 executes a process for stopping power supply for storing necessary data (for example, backup flag, checksum) in the backup RAM area. To do.

Next, the CPU 103 identifies the set value stored in the set value confirmation buffer, and displays the identified set value on the display monitor 012IW029 (step 012IWS032). Further, the CPU 103 controls the external output of the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board (step 012IWS033).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS034). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process directly proceeds to step 012IWS043.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the setting change flag (step 012IWS035) and starts the setting change process. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the initial setting completion flag indicating that the value has been already set in the clear switch buffer for the first time since the gaming machine was powered on (step 012IWS036). The clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (whether it is in the on state or the off state) of the clear switch. For example, in the clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set when the clear switch is on, and a value of "0" is set when the clear switch is off. If the initial setting completed flag is set (if the value has already been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time since the power of the gaming machine was turned on), the process directly proceeds to step 012IWS039.

If the flag set for the first time is not set (that is, if the value has not been set in the clear switch buffer even once since the game machine was powered on), the CPU 103 turns the clear switch buffer on. The value shown (for example, "1") is set (step 012IWS037). Further, the CPU 103 sets the initial setting completion flag (step 012IWS038).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the value currently set in the clear switch buffer in the previous clear switch buffer (step 012IWS039). The previous clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (whether it is in the on state or the off state) of the clear switch confirmed last time (4 ms before in this example). For example, in the last time clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set when the previously confirmed clear switch is in the on state, and a value of "0" is set in the off state.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the current input state of the clear switch and sets the current input state of the clear switch in the clear switch buffer (step 012IWS040). Next, the CPU 103 turns off the value set in the clear switch buffer last time (for example, "0") and turns on the value set for the clear switch buffer (for example, "1"). It is confirmed whether or not (step 012IWS041).

If the value previously set in the clear switch buffer is off and the value previously set in the clear switch buffer is on, the CPU 103 updates the set value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029. It is displayed and stored in the set value confirmation buffer (update stored for the set value already stored) (step 012IWS042). For example, when "1" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display on the display monitor 012IW029 is updated to "2" and the set value "2" is stored in the set value determination buffer. If "2" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display on the display monitor 012IW029 is updated to "3" and the set value "3" is stored in the set value determination buffer. If "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display on the display monitor 012IW029 is updated to "1" and the set value "1" is stored in the set value determination buffer.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is turned on (step 012IWS043). If the setting key 012IW051 remains on, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030, the processes of steps 012IWS030 to S043 are repeatedly executed, and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the setting key 012IW051 is off, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, and proceeds to step 012IWS044.

When the RAM clear flag is not set by performing the processing of the above steps 012IWS025 to S043 (that is, when the clear switch is not turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on) (steps 012IWS025 and S034). N), the setting confirmation command is transmitted (step 012IWS026) and the setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) is performed, but the setting change process is not performed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is set (that is, when the clear switch is turned on when the gaming machine is powered on) (step 012IWS025, S034 Y), a setting change command is transmitted (step 012IWS027). At the same time, a setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) and a setting change process (particularly 012IWS035 to S042) are performed.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) in the security information timer for setting the output period of the security signal (step 012IWS044). In this example, when the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the external output of the security signal is started by executing the process of step 012IWS033. In step 012IWS044, the security information timer is set, and the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the value of the security information timer, so that the security signal continues until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. And output to the outside.

On the other hand, in this example, the security signal is externally output even when a RAM abnormality or the like occurs by executing the process of step 012IWS020, but in this case, the power supply to the gaming machine is reset. The security signal is continuously output to the outside until it is done.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the setting change flag (step 012IWS045). Further, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 (step 012IWS046). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set set value to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (step 012IWS047).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS048). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to the recovery process of step 012IWS049. Note that the processing of steps 012IWS049 and S050 in the feature unit 099IW is the same as the processing of steps S6 and S7 shown in FIG.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process to clear the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 (012IWS051). Note that the processing of steps 012IWS052 to S055 in this feature unit 099IW is the same as the processing of steps S9 to S12 shown in FIG.

FIG. 8-14 is an explanatory diagram of a process executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic unit 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-14, when the setting key 012IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) and the setting change process (particularly 012IWS035 to S042) are executed, the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 012IWS051)) is executed, and the clear switch is off. For example, only the setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) is executed and the restoration process (step 012IWS049) is executed. If the setting key 012IW051 is off when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 012IWS051)) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, Only the restoration process (step 012IWS049) is executed.

Next, a display mode of the display monitor 012IW029 in the setting confirmation process and the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 8-15(A) and FIG. 8-15(B), when the power is turned off (power is cut) by the operation of the clerk at the game hall, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 012IW029 ends. When the big winning game is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing of turning off the power, the big prize hole is closed by stopping the power supply to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-15(C), when a store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 012IW051 is turned on. The setting check process is executed by the CPU 103 under the condition that the setting value is set, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 012IW029.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 8-15(D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the clear switch by the store clerk or the like in the game hall in the setting change process. Each time it is performed, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the clear switch is operated, it is updated as 1→2→3→1→... ). Further, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-15(E), the CPU 103 turns off the display monitor 012IW029 based on that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the operation of the store clerk or the like in the game hall, thereby turning on the game hall. The clerk or the like is notified that the new setting value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

Further, when the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 8-15(A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory about the big hit is erased, the special winning opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process and becomes in a state in which a game can be played, that is, a variation display result, a big hit type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change processing in the characteristic unit 099IW, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 012IW029, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value most disadvantageous to the player (“1” in the case of this feature section 099IW) or the most advantageous to the player You may make it display a setting value ("3" in case of this characteristic part 099IW).

In the example shown in FIG. 8-15, the setting value is displayed using the first display of the four-digit display on the display monitor 012IW029 when confirming or changing the setting value. Without being limited to this mode, for example, the second and subsequent displays on the display monitor 012IW029 may be used to display the set value. Further, for example, the set value may be displayed by performing a dedicated 4-digit display on the display monitor 012IW029. In this case, for example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 012IW029 displays 4-digit "-S-1", and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 012IW029 shows "-S-2". May be displayed, or if the set value is "3", the display monitor 012IW029 may display "-S-3" in four digits. Further, for example, the set value may be displayed on all four-digit displays of the display monitor 012IW029. For example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 012IW029 displays four digits of "1111", and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 012IW029 displays four digits of "2222". May be.

(Special symbol normal processing)
Next, the process of the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the feature unit 099IW will be described. 8-16 and 8-17 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) (step 012IWS171). For example, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether the second pending storage number is 0 (step 012IWS172). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol). Is set to "2nd" (step 012IWS173). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step 012IWS174).

By performing the processing of steps 012IWS172 to S174, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol in this feature unit 099IW. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in accordance with the order of starting winning in which the game balls win the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol It may be configured to execute and.

Next, in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 012IWS175). Specifically, the CPU 103, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved memories=1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the content of each storage area (step 012IWS176). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the storage area of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the content of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer is shifted.

That is, the CPU 103, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages=n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of reserved storages=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers (or the respective second reserved memory numbers) are always extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or, The second reserved memory number)=1, 2, 3, 4 and the order.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step 012IWS177). The CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the second effect control board 012IW12b (step 012IWS178). In the characteristic unit 112, as described above, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed when the power is turned on by executing the process of step 012IWS047. The setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the process of 012IWS178.

In this example, the same setting value command is transmitted when the setting value command is transmitted in step 012IWS047 and when the setting value command is transmitted in step 012IWS178, but the setting value command is different. It may be configured to send a command. For example, in step 012IWS047, a command that directly specifies the setting value (for example, commands 9E01(H) to 9E03(H) according to the setting values “1” to “3”) is transmitted, while in step 012IWS178, the setting value is set. It may be configured such that identifiable fluctuation pattern commands are transmitted and the fluctuation pattern commands are prepared for the number of set values (for example, for the set value "1", commands 1C00(H) to The command 2C00(H)-is prepared as the variation pattern command at the setting value "2", and the command 3C00(H)-is prepared as the variation pattern command at the setting value "3".

Further, in the case of the above-described configuration, if different variation pattern commands are transmitted for each set value even when the same variation pattern is used, the total number of variation patterns×the number of set values (3 in this example) ) Minute variation pattern command is required, which may increase the data capacity. Therefore, for example, the setting value command may be transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only the variation pattern commands corresponding to the specific variation pattern may be provided with the variation pattern commands corresponding to the number of setting values. Good. In this case, for example, the set value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation are changed pattern commands corresponding to the number of set values. May be provided.

In this example, the same set value command is sent as the set value command (see step 012IWS047) sent when the power is turned on and the set value command (see step 012IWS178) sent when the fluctuation starts. It is not limited to various forms. For example, even if the set value command for power-on and the set value command for fluctuation start are configured as separate commands and different set value commands are transmitted at power-on and at fluctuation start Good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but it is configured to transmit the effect control command that combines the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. Good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted when the set value is “3”.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and whichever of the first effect control CPU 012IW120a and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b side It may be configured such that which fluctuation pattern is selected and the selection ratio thereof are different depending on the setting value of For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high. Alternatively, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected with a setting value of 3, or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high rate. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 may have the same variation time, but may be configured to have different presence/absence of pseudo stations, number of pseudo stations, presence/absence of reach, and type. Further, in this case, for example, when the set value command is not normally received, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the set value command is not normally received, a dedicated selection ratio The variation pattern may be selected with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the fluctuation.

In addition, the CPU 103 controls to send a background designating command to the second effect control board 012IW12b according to the current game state (step 012IWS179). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designating command in the case of the probability variation state, and controls to transmit a time saving state background designation command in the case of the time saving state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit judging module compares a predetermined big hit judging value and a small hit judging value (see FIG. 8-7) with the random number value MR1 and, when they match each other, carries out a process of deciding to make a big hit or a small hit. The program to execute. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 012IWS180), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (step 012IWS181). When it is decided to make a small hit (Y in step 012IWS181), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit has been made (step 012IWS182), and proceeds to step 012IWS186.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match either the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (N in step 012IWS181), that is, if it is out of alignment, the process directly proceeds to step 012IWS186.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 012IWS180), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step 012IWS183). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 8-8) to determine the type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A , "Big hit type B" or "big hit type C") is determined as a big hit type (step 012IWS184).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS185). For example, when the big hit type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 012IWS186). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is a falling symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the big hit flag is set, "7" which is a big hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. In addition, you may decide to the stop symbol of a different special symbol according to the big hit type. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5" which is a small hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 012IWS187).

(Production control main processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the characteristic part 099IW will be described. FIG. 8-18(A) is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing in the characteristic unit 099IW.

In the effect control main processing, first, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not a power-off signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 (step 099IWS001). When the power-off signal is input (Y in step 099IWS001), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines that the gaming machine itself has been powered off (that is, the gaming machine itself has been restarted), It waits until the input of the power-off signal is stopped (step 099IWS002 N). Then, when the input of the power-off signal is stopped (Y in step 099IWS002), the process proceeds to step 099IWS201.

When the power-off signal has not been input from the beginning of the process (Y in step 099IWS001), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has caused a system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (that is, for the second effect control). It is determined that only the CPU 012IW120b has been restarted), the date information is input from the real-time clock 012IW126, and the log information storage process including the input date information as the system reset date of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is executed (step 012IWS003). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 099IWS201.

In this feature unit 099IW, the processing of steps 099IWS201 to S202 is the same as the processing of steps S71 to S72 shown in FIG. Note that, in the feature part 099IW, in the initialization process of step 099IWS201, control is performed to display an initial image on the image display device 5 (as long as it can be recognized that the gaming machine is operating). Not limited to such a configuration, the control for displaying the initial image on the image display device 5 is performed only when it is determined that the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs, and the gaming machine itself is restarted. By performing control to display a different initial image between when it is determined that it is determined that only the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is restarted, a startup history (that is, system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, etc. Whether or not occurs) may be recognized at a glance.

When the initial operation control process of step 012IWS202 is executed, if the second effect control CPU012IW120b has not determined that the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b has occurred (N of step 012IWS203), the date and time is output from the real-time clock 012IW126. Information is input, and a log information storage process that includes the input date and time information as the power-on date and time is executed (step 012IWS204).

By executing the processing of Step 012IWS003 and Step 012IWS204, the data indicating the log information including the system reset date and the power-on date and time is stored in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 in the log area provided in the backup data. Is written and stored as. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b transmits a control signal corresponding to the power-on backup command to the backup memory board 099IW14 via the serial communication circuit 099IW137. In the backup memory board 099IW14, the memory controller 099IW200 may execute the log information writing process including the system reset date and time or the power-on date and time in response to the backup command indicated by the control signal received via the serial communication circuit 099IW202. ..

In the feature control unit 099IW, in the effect control main processing, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, when the power-off signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, power failure of the gaming machine itself has occurred ( That is, it is determined that the gaming machine itself has been restarted), and the start of control is awaited until the input of the power-off signal is stopped (corresponding to Y of step 099IWS001, processing of 099IWS002). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the storage process of the log information including the power-on date and time (corresponding to the process of step 099IWS204). Further, when the power of the gaming machine itself is cut off (that is, the gaming machine itself is restarted), a command for power-on such as a setting change command, a setting confirmation command, an initialization designation command, and a restoration command is issued from the main board 11. Is transmitted, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes processing based on these commands (e.g., corresponding to processing of steps 012IWS802, 012IWS805, 012IWS809, etc. described later). Further, a storage process of log information including the power cut date and time (for example, corresponding to the process of step 012IWS847 described later) is also executed.

On the other hand, in the effect control main process, when the power-off signal is not input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b causes a system reset or the like of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b ( That is, it is determined that only the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has been restarted), and the log information including the system reset date and time is stored in the log area without waiting for the start of control (corresponding to the processing of step 099IWS003). When a system reset or the like of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs (that is, only the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is restarted), a setting change command, a setting confirmation command, an initialization designation command, a command for restoration from the main board 11 Since the commands for turning on the power are not transmitted, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not execute the processing based on those commands. Further, neither the log information storage process including the power-on date and time nor the log information storage process including the power-off date and time is executed.

In this way, in the characteristic part 099IW, when the control of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is started (that is, when the operation becomes possible), the power of the gaming machine itself is cut off (that is, the gaming machine itself is restarted), and the second It is possible to specify which of the system reset of the effect control CPU 012IW120b (that is, the restart of only the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) has occurred. Then, when a system reset or the like of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs, the storage process of the log information including the system reset date and time is executed, while the process of waiting for the start of the control (Y in step 099IWS001, 099IWS002) and the power supply. Even if it is necessary at the time of power failure of the gaming machine itself, such as storage processing of log information including date and time of input (step 099IWS204) and storage processing of log information including date and time of power failure (step 012IWS847 described later), second effect control When the system of the dedicated CPU 012IW120b is reset, unnecessary processing is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably determine the situation at the time of turning on the power supply, and it is possible to execute the optimum processing according to the situation.

In this feature section 099IW, in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14, as a log area for recording log information, a first log area for recording log information for a game arcade and log information for a gaming machine maker. And a second log area for recording Then, when the power failure of the gaming machine itself occurs, a storage process of storing the log information including the power-on date and time and the log information including the power-off date and time in the first log area is executed (step 012IWS204, 012IWS847). Equivalent to processing). On the other hand, when the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs instead of the power failure of the gaming machine itself, the storage process of storing the log information including the system reset date and time in the second log area is executed (step. (Corresponding to the processing of 012IWS003).

In the feature part 099IW, for the log information recorded in the second log area, the inspection device is connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the inspection device and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b are connected. , Is read out by inputting/outputting the inspection signal. That is, it has an output means for outputting log information capable of specifying the activation history. With such a configuration, log information including the system reset date and time can be used as information for development and debugging by the gaming machine manufacturer.

There are various types of log information to be backed up, such as system data, effect control error data, and received command data. In this example, the first log area is displayed as history information in the maintenance mode. Log information is stored. For example, log information such as power-on date/time, setting change start date/time, setting confirmation start date/time, and RAM clear date/time is stored (step 099IWS204, 012IWS805, 012IWS805, 012IWS809, etc.). 8-47).

On the other hand, log information used as information for development and debugging is stored in the second log area. For example, the system reset date and time, log information such as exceptional event information and received command data, which will be described later, are stored (a portion that executes processing such as steps 099IWS003 and 099IWS42).

In the characteristic part 099IW, the log information recorded in the second log area is not displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration and is recorded in the second log area. Part or all of the log information (excluding those that overlap with the log information recorded in the first log area) may be displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode.

In addition, for example, when a predetermined backup condition is satisfied, such as when a system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has occurred, the log information is stored in both the first log area and the second log area. You may make it perform a process. The division of the log information stored in the first log area and the second log area is not limited to the configuration of this example. Also, three or more log areas may be provided.

Further, the backup method may be different for the first log area and the second log area. For example, when the backup method is a batch backup, the backup target data for one backup is stored in an interrupt process based on the occurrence of one effect control timer interrupt process, and the backup method is a split backup. , The backup target data for one backup is stored in the interrupt process based on a plurality of effect control timer interrupt processes. As described above, by properly using the backup method, it is possible to appropriately perform backup according to the log information.

Further, the backup multiplicity may be different between the first log area and the second log area. The multiplicity is a degree of mirroring in which backup target data indicating the same log information is distributed and stored while overlapping in different log areas, and whether or not the data is mirrored for storage and storage in the case of mirroring are stored. The number of times can be specified. For example, when the multiplicity is "1", mirroring is not performed, and backup target data indicating the same log information is stored and backed up only once. When the multiplicity is “2”, the mirroring is performed twice, and the backup target data indicating the same log information is stored twice in different storage areas for backup. When the multiplicity is “3”, the mirroring is performed three times, and the backup target data indicating the same log information is stored in different storage areas three times for backup. By increasing the multiplicity, it is possible to improve redundancy (availability) and enhance reliability of stored data.

8-19 shows an example of execution of backup processing with different multiplicities. By executing the program read from the ROM 012IW121b, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has the functions of the memory writing processing units 43AKM11 and 43AKM12 and the functions of the occurrence event information creation processing units 43AKM21 and 43AKM22. The backup data memories 099IW 210A to 210C of the backup memory board 099IW14 are provided with the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 as well as the backup storage unit 43AKA21. The backup storage unit 43AKA11 includes backup storage areas 43AKA111 to 43AKA113 as log areas, the backup storage unit 43AKA12 includes backup storage areas 43AKA121 to 43AKA123 as log areas, and the backup storage unit 43AKA13 includes log areas. The backup storage areas 43AKA131 to 43AKA133 are provided. On the other hand, the backup storage unit 43AKA21 includes backup storage areas 43AKA21 1 to 43AKA213 as log areas.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 creates backup data corresponding to the case where the backup condition with the multiplicity of "3" is satisfied. The memory writing processing unit 43AKM11 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 099IW14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. The same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is redundantly distributed and stored in the three backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. For example, the backup data first acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is stored in the backup storage area 43AKA111 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA121 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA131 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. , Is stored by copying and writing. The backup data acquired next from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is stored in the backup storage area 43AKA112 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA122 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA132 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. It is stored by copying and writing. The backup data further acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is the backup storage area 43AKA113 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA123 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA133 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. It is stored by copying and writing.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 creates backup data corresponding to the case where the backup condition with the multiplicity of "1" is satisfied. The memory writing processing unit 43AKM12 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory substrate 099IW14 and stored in the log area of the backup storage unit 43AKA21. In addition, the multiplicity corresponds to “1”, and single backup data is stored without being distributed without mirroring. For example, the backup data initially acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored by being written in the backup storage area 43AKA211 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The backup data acquired next from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored by being written in the backup storage area 43AKA212 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The backup data further acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 22 is stored by being written in the backup storage area 43AKA213 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying.

The log information recorded in the second log area is not displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode, and cannot be confirmed without using a dedicated inspection device. Is allowed (at least it is not a problem for the game machine administrator at the game store), but the log information recorded in the first log area is displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode. , It is desirable that the backup be performed reliably.

However, for example, some or all of the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory substrate 099IW14 are configured by using a nonvolatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) (Ferroelectric RAM), and the serial communication circuit 099IW137 and the serial communication are used. When the communication data is configured to be transmitted and received through the circuit 099IW202 by the serial communication method (for example, the communication speed becomes slower than that of the bus connection method), when the multiplicity is increased and the backup is performed, The backup may take a long time to complete. Then, when the manager of the game shop immediately restarts the gaming machine in the situation where the predetermined error has occurred, the predetermined error is not recorded as log information (that is, displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen). The situation may occur, which may lead to distrust.

Therefore, for the log information stored in the first log area, the backup multiplicity is set to "1", and the backup target data indicating the log information is stored only once and backed up. As for the log information stored in the second log area, the backup multiplicity is set to "2" or "3", and the backup target data indicating the log information is stored only twice or three times and backed up. .. Further, the backup method to the first log area may be a batch backup so that the processing can be completed quickly, and the backup method to the second log area may be a split backup to disperse the processing load. With such a configuration, in the maintenance mode, the log information that should be displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen may be missing (for example, the backup process may not be completed before the gaming machine is restarted). In addition to the prevention, it is possible to improve the redundancy (availability) of the log information stored in the second log area used as information for development and debugging of the game machine manufacturer. That is, a suitable backup can be realized according to the characteristics of the log information.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes an interrupt initial setting process (step 099IWS205). In the interrupt initial setting process of step 099IWS205, it is sufficient that the interrupt priority controlled by the interrupt controller mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b can be initialized. The priority order of the interrupts controlled by the interrupt controller may be set based on the interrupt priority data stored in advance in the program management area provided in the ROM 012IW 121b. For example, the priority order of the interrupt may be set so that the serial reception interrupt has a higher priority than the effect control timer interrupt. Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the interrupt permission (step 099IWS206), and then enters the loop process.

FIG. 8-18(B) shows an example of setting the processing priority in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. The processing priority in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is determined in advance based on the specifications of the second effect control board 012IW12a together with the priority order of the interrupts controlled by the interrupt controller mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12a. It should be possible. As an example, the CPU exception event occurrence process has the highest priority, then the serial reception interrupt has the highest priority, and then the process according to the interrupt priority controlled by the interrupt controller. It is sufficient that the processing priority is set in advance so that the processing priority is set.

The CPU exception event occurrence process is a process executed when an exception event due to an abnormality in the internal state occurs in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. The exceptional event of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b may occur when an undefined instruction that is not defined in the instruction set is decoded. The exceptional event of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b may occur when an invalid operation such as division by zero or overflow is executed. The exceptional event of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b may occur when the memory protection violation in the virtual memory has occurred. The exceptional event of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b may occur in the case of a TLB (Translation Lookaside Buffer) miss in which translation from a virtual address to a physical address becomes abnormal. In this way, the CPU exceptional event occurrence time process is executed when the exceptional event of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs. Therefore, when the event occurrence condition according to the internal state of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is satisfied, the CPU exception event occurrence time process is executed. The CPU exception event occurrence time process can be executed when a condition for occurrence of an event that can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control device or the processing device such as the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is satisfied.

FIG. 8-20 is a flowchart showing an example of CPU exception event occurrence processing. In the CPU exception event occurrence processing, first, exception preprocessing is executed (step 099IWS41). In the exception pre-processing of step 099IWS41, for example, the control information for executing the instruction code is saved in a predetermined area (stack area or the like) of the RAM012IW122b. The control information for executing the instruction code may include the stored value of the program counter (PC) and the value of the program status word (PSW). Subsequent to the pre-exception process, a backup process at the exceptional time is executed (step 099IWS42). In the exceptional backup process of step 099IWS42, a storage process of log information including exceptional event information is executed. In this case, the control signal corresponding to the backup instruction for the occurrence of the exceptional event is transmitted to the backup memory board 099IW14. The backup instruction for the exceptional event occurrence is exceptional event information indicating that the exceptional event occurred in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b can be specified, and date/time information acquired from the real-time clock 012IW126 (for example, date/time information acquired from RTC099IW201). May be used). The exceptional event information may indicate the type of exceptional event in a distinguishable manner. When the memory controller 099IW200 of the backup memory board 099IW14 receives the backup instruction for the exceptional event occurrence, it may execute the write process of the log information including the exceptional event information.

After the exceptional backup processing, other exceptional processing is executed (step 099IWS43). In step 099IWS43, the exception handling routine may be started by, for example, accessing the vector table and jumping to the obtained exception handler address. At this time, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register or the like) of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b may be saved. If the exception event can be resolved by the exception handling routine, or if the exception event cannot be resolved and a reset occurs, the backup process similar to step 099IWS42 is executed to resolve the exception event or it can be resolved. You may make it possible to memorize the log information when there is no log. When the exceptional process is completed, the exceptional post-process is executed (step 099IWS44), and the CPU exceptional event occurrence process is terminated. In the exceptional post-processing of step 099IWS44, the processing before the exception event occurs by restoring the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register or the like) of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b and restoring the control information for instruction code execution. It should be possible to return to.

The CPU exception event occurrence process includes the exception time backup process of step 099IWS42. In the exceptional backup process of step 099IWS42, as backup data indicating the log information, the data including the exceptional event information regarding the second production control CPU 012IW120b among the plurality of electronic components, the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. A writing process for writing to the log area provided in the is executed. The CPU exceptional event occurrence time process is executed when an exceptional event of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs, as when an event occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is satisfied. As described above, when the event occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the control device or the processing device such as the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is satisfied, a plurality of electronic components are stored in the storage area such as the log area. A writing process for writing and storing information regarding

After the interrupt control is set in step 099IWS206 of the effect control main process, a timeout occurs in a predetermined channel of the timer circuit 135 every predetermined time (such as 2 milliseconds), so that the second effect control board 012IW12a is mounted. The generated interrupt controller outputs an interrupt request signal corresponding to a timer interrupt for effect control to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b that receives the interrupt request signal and accepts the interrupt request starts execution of the effect control timer interrupt process.

8-21 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process for effect control. In this feature unit 099IW, the processing of steps 012IWS204 to S208 is the same as the processing of steps S73 to S77 shown in FIG. When the effect random number updating process of step 012IWS208 is executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the effect mode change process of changing the effect mode (step 012IWS209).

In the present feature section 099IW, it is possible to control in three types of effect modes, effect mode A to effect mode C, and, for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. The types of characters that appear in the notice production and reach production are different. In the effect mode change process of step 012IWS209, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, the effect mode may be changed based on the fact that a predetermined day or time has been reached based on the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126. Further, for example, the lottery process based on a random number may be executed to change the effect mode based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 012IWS209, when the second effect control CPU 012IW120b changes the effect mode, for example, the flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change may be set and the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. .. For example, when changing to the effect mode A, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode B is changed, the effect mode B flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode C is changed, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

The way of changing the effect mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as effect mode A→effect mode B→effect mode C→effect mode A→. You may make it change randomly from the modes A to C.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes an error notification process for performing various error notifications (step 012IWS210). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the maintenance mode during the setting confirmation, and executes the maintenance mode processing for displaying the maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen (step 012IWS211).

In the maintenance mode process of step 099IWS211, control is performed so that the maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen can be displayed. The maintenance history screen, for example, when the setting confirmation display corresponding to the setting confirmation state or the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed, detection of an operation that is an operation performed by an attendant at the game arcade on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. It can be displayed when it is determined that the maintenance history selection operation is performed based on the result. When displaying the maintenance history screen, all the log information is read from the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 (strictly speaking, the log for the amusement store is included in the log information). Only the information is read, not the log information for the gaming machine manufacturer). The image display device 5 displays a maintenance history screen including the read log information as history information. The setting change/confirmation history screen can be displayed when it is determined that the setting change/confirmation history selection operation has been performed based on the detection result of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, which is an operation performed by an attendant in the game arcade. Become. When the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed, all setting change and setting confirmation log information is read from the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. The image display device 5 displays a setting change/confirmation history screen including the read setting change and setting confirmation log information as history information. It should be noted that the maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen may be displayed based on the detection result of the operation that is performed by the person in charge at the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, unlike the staff at the game arcade. Good. The maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen are screens that the player of the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot see during the game, and may be screens that can be confirmed by the game staff or the person in charge of the manufacturer. Good.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes a setting change time recording process for recording the date and time when the setting value is changed in the setting changing process (step 012IWS212). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes a current time setting process for setting the current time during the maintenance mode (step 012IWS213). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the power cut date recording process for recording the power cut date and time when the power cut occurs (step 012IWS214). After performing the effect control backup process (step 099IWS215), the effect control timer interrupt process ends.

In the production control backup process executed in step 099IWS215 of the production control timer interrupt process, it is determined whether a preset backup condition is satisfied. Then, when it is determined that the backup condition is satisfied, a backup process for storing and storing the backup target data according to the satisfied backup condition is executed. As the backup condition, a plurality of different conditions may be set according to the occurrence of an event including various changes and settings in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The backup control table indicating a plurality of backup conditions may be stored in advance in a predetermined area (a program management area or the like) provided in the ROM 012IW 121b, for example. The backup target data may include different data depending on backup conditions. Alternatively, the backup target data may include data common to a plurality of backup conditions. Regardless of which backup condition is satisfied, backup target data indicating log information including date and time information may be stored. As a backup method for storing the data to be backed up, a batch backup and a split backup may be prepared. In the case of a batch backup, the backup target data for one backup is stored in the interrupt processing based on the occurrence of one timer interrupt for effect control. In the case of divided backup, backup target data for one backup is stored in interrupt processing based on a plurality of effect control timer interrupts.

The backup process for storing and storing the backup target data according to the backup condition is executed every time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed when the backup condition is satisfied in the effect control backup process of step 099IWS215. It may be possible, or may be collectively executable when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When it is determined that the backup condition is satisfied in the production control backup process when the backup process is collectively executed when the power is cut off, for example, a backup target indicating log information including date and time information is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM012IW122b. Remember the data.

(Command analysis process)
8-22 and 8-23 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step 012IWS206). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 012IWS301). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 012IWS302). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 012IWS303). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read.

If the received effect control command is the setting value command (step 012IWS304), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the setting value indicated by the received setting value command in the setting value storage area formed in the RAM 012IW122b. (Step 012IWS305). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power of the gaming machine is turned on (step 012IWS306). In the characteristic part 099IW, the setting value and the setting value command reception flag stored in the setting value storage area are reset in the initialization process (step 012IWS201) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. And

In addition, in this feature unit 099IW, the set value command is transmitted when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the setting change processing is performed. However, the set value command is normally transmitted due to missing command or garbled data. If not received, the processing of step 012IWS305 is not executed, and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this feature unit 099IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each variable display. Therefore, the process of step 012IWS305 is performed based on the received set value command. It can be executed so that the set value is stored in the set value storage area.

Further, even if the set value command is received, the set value included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the set value command is read on the side of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, the set value command is set. It may be configured to determine whether or not the set value included in the command is a normal value. For example, in this example, the setting value is configured to be set to any one of “1” to “3”, but includes a value that cannot be set such as “5” or “10”. If the setting value command is abnormal, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Moreover, for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b side stores the setting value indicated by the received setting value command, and when a new setting value command is received thereafter, the newly received setting value command is received. If the set value indicated by the command does not match the previously stored set value, it may be determined that the inconsistency has occurred, and the abnormality may be determined. Then, even when it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command has not been normally received, and the effect is limited according to the processing method shown in the feature section 099IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial result setting)
In the feature section 099IW, when the second effect control board 012IW12b receives the initialization designation command or the restoration command from the main board 11 in the command analysis processing, the image display device 5 performs a predetermined initial operation. A control for displaying a result (specifically, a combination of decorative patterns, which is displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started) is performed (hereinafter, also referred to as an initial result presentation). ).

If the received production control command is the initialization designation command or the command at the time of restoration (step 012IWS307), the second production control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS308). .. If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting change process is executed and the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the set value storage area in the RAM 012IW122b. Based on the stored setting value, using the initial hit determination table, even initial hits (for example, "246" and "224", etc.) that are a combination of even hits, and odd hits It is determined to be either an odd-numbered initial result which is a combination (for example, "135" or "113") and a special initial result which is a combination of decorative patterns including a special pattern (for example, a star pattern) (step 012IWS309). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS314.

8-24 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the initial result determination table. In step 012IWS309, lottery processing based on a random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area by using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. Determine the outcome. In the initial outcome determination table shown in FIG. 8-24(A), the odds of initial outcomes are determined to be higher in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3”. Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the start of the game, if the odd initial number is displayed, it means that the setting has been changed, and the set value is advantageous compared with the case where the even initial number is displayed. Will be suggested to be set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-24(A), the special initial appearance may be decided only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the game is started, it is determined that the setting has been changed and the setting value is "3". With such a configuration, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game can be made interested, and the motivation to play the game can be given from an early time zone of the business hours of the game store, and the interest can be enhanced.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to a command being missed or data being garbled), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 012IWS310). Whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines that the set value is "1" and determines the initial result using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. 8-24(A) ( Step 012IWS311). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS314.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS310 to S311, in the feature unit 099IW, the setting value which is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. The initial result is determined to be "1". As shown in FIG. 8-24(A), with respect to the set value “1”, the odds of being decided as the initial odd number are the lowest, and there is no case of being decided as the special initial number. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the player is discouraged by displaying an odd-numbered initial result or a special initial result despite the disadvantageous set value, and the interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

If not the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 012IWS312). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b uses the initial effect determination table for effect mode C to determine the initial result (step 012IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS314.

FIG. 8-24(B) is an explanatory view showing an example of the initial result determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 8-24(B), in the initial result determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined as an odd initial result as compared with the case of the setting value “3” that is most advantageous for the player. The percentage is low, and there is no case where it is decided to be a special initial result.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS312 to S313, in the characteristic unit 099IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the production mode C is set, a disadvantageous setting value is set. Despite the fact that odd initial numbers and special initial numbers are displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to display the initial result determined in steps 012IWS309, S311, and S313 (step 012IWS314).

In addition, in the characteristic part 099IW, it is described that the display of the image display device 5 is controlled, the control of turning on the game effect lamp 9 is performed, and the control of outputting the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is performed. The second effect control CPU 012IW120a does not directly control the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8L and 8R, but more specifically, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not control the first effect control CPU 012IW120a. A command for controlling the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8L, 8R is transmitted to. Then, on the side of the first effect control CPU 012IW120a, based on the command from the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8L, 8R are controlled to perform various effects and notifications. This also applies to the other similar description portions in the feature part 099IW.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines the initial result to be an even initial result and displays an image. In the device 5, control is performed to display an even initial number (step 012IWS315).

By executing the processing of step 012IWS315, in the characteristic part 099IW, even when the set value command is not normally received, and in the production mode B, the even initial numbers are uniformly displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by displaying odd initial numbers and special initial numbers despite the disadvantageous set values, and to prevent a decline in interest in the game. I have to.

Even when the setting value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, it may be configured to be able to determine the odd initial winning symbol at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the determination rate of the odd-numbered initial-drawing symbols is set lower than the setting value "1" of the initial-numbering determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the eye symbol.

In this example, the case where the set value command is not normally received and the even initial number is uniformly displayed in the production mode B is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, when the set value command cannot be received normally and in the production mode B, when the set value command cannot be received normally, such as a combination of symbols "????" as the initial result. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial result. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest the setting value in any form may be displayed as the initial result.

Further, the processing when the set value command is not successfully received (or when the set value is not normally stored) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when it is determined to be N in step 012IWS308, the setting value “1” may be stored in the setting value storage area as a default to determine the initial result. In addition, for example, it is configured to store a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value “4”) indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally in the setting value storage area and determine the initial result. Good.

If the received production control command is a setting value abnormality error command (step 012IWS316), the second production control CPU 012IW120b executes setting value abnormality error notification (step 012IWS317). For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b displays a character display such as "A setting value error has occurred" on the image display device 5, or a voice or an error sound indicating the setting value error from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output or the game effect lamp 9 or LED is controlled to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the set value abnormality error is notified, the loudspeaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound with a maximum volume and an error sound, and the game effect lamp 9 and the LED emit light with the maximum brightness (for example, of a full-color LED). In this case, it is desirable to emit white light.

If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (effect control command that specifies a change pattern) (step 012IWS320), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b changes the received change pattern command to the change pattern formed in the RAM 012IW122b. The data is stored in the command storage area (step 012IWS321). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 012IWS322).

If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (effect control command for specifying whether to make a big hit or small hit, big hit type, small hit type) (step 012IWS323), second effect The control CPU 012IW120b stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 012IW122b (step 012IWS324).

If the received production control command is a design confirmation designation command (production control command that designates that the stop design of the decorative design is confirmed and displayed) (step 012IWS325), the second production control CPU 012IW120b sets the confirmation command reception flag. (Step 012IWS326).

If the received production control command is a big hit start designation command (a production control command that specifies the start of a big hit game) (step 012IWS327), the second production control CPU 012IW120b sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step 012IWS328). ).

If the received effect control command is a big hit end designation command (effect control command that specifies the end of the big hit game) (step 012IWS329), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step 012IWS330). ).

If the received effect control command is any other command, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the received effect control command or sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step 012IWS331). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS301.

In addition, in the characteristic part 099IW, if the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, the odd initial number is not displayed, but even if the odd initial number can be displayed, Good. Also in this case, the odd number initial odds may be determined differently according to the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

Also, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd-numbered initial numbers and even-numbered initial numbers, an initial number that denies the possibility of a specific setting value (for example, the possibility of a setting value of 1 is denied, A value 2 or a set value 3 is confirmed), or an initial result that a specific set value is confirmed may be provided and displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, when the specific initial result is displayed by not determining the specific initial result, the possibility of the set value 1 is denied, and the set value 2 or It is decided that the set value is 3. Further, for example, only when the setting value is 3, the specific initial result is determined, and when the specific initial result is displayed, it is determined that the setting value is 3. .. Further, when determining the initial outcome, one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the feature part 099IW, the setting value is configured to be changeable, and as a setting suggesting effect that suggests the setting value, a pre-game suggesting effect that is executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, during the game (for example, , It is possible to execute the suggestion during the game executed during the variation display of the decorative pattern, the setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the variation pattern described above, and the suggestion during the big hit during the big hit (for example, during the big hit game) Has been done. It should be noted that in the present feature unit 099IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of kinds of effect modes having different suggestion reliability. The reliability of suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of suggestion may be higher in the order of pre-game suggestive effect> suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect during game, or pre-game suggestive effect> suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect during big hit. The suggestion reliability during the game may be higher in the order of suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect before game, or suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect before game. Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution ratio of each setting suggestion production can be set. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, pre-game suggestion effects or initial appearance effects in which setting change is suggested), or the execution rate. The setting may be changed to lower (or increase). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set by operating the operation means such as the push button 31B or the operation means such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine (only the administrator can operate). May be changed.

(Variable display start wait processing)
FIG. 8-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 012IWS501).

When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to end the customer waiting demonstration effect if it is being executed (step 012IWS502, step 012IWS503).

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the variation pattern command reception flag (step 012IWS504), updates the value of the effect process flag to "1" (step 012IWS505), and ends the variable display start waiting process.

When the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not execute the customer waiting demonstration effect (N in step 012IWS506), and the result of the time measurement by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition. It is confirmed whether or not (step 012IWS507). In step 012IWS507, for example, when the timer (for example, set to 30 seconds) set when the previous variable display (display result “miss”) ends, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. Also, when the timer is not set (that is, after the power is turned on, the variable display has not been executed even once and before the start of the game), it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. In other words, if the variable display is not executed for a predetermined period of time (and is not controlled to the big hit game state) or before the game is started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed by the process described later. Will be executed.

If the result of timing by the timing means matches the predetermined condition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0 (step 012IWS508). That is, in step 012IWS508, it is confirmed whether the game has not started yet. Whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, specifically, a number-of-changes counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display of the decorative pattern after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, which will be described later. It can be determined by checking whether the value of (see step 012IWS603) is 0 or not.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS509). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Then, using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode when executing the pre-game suggestive effect are determined (step 012IWS510). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS515.

In this feature part 099IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp becomes the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is controlled, the decoration lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect mode is performed. When the customer waiting demonstration effect including the mode is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

FIG. 8-26 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table. In Step 012IWS510, by using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26(A), a lottery process based on a random number is performed in accordance with the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined. In the pre-game suggestive effect determination table of FIG. 8-26(A), determination values are assigned in order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” so that the rate at which the pre-game suggestive effect is executed becomes higher. Has been. In addition, the determination value is assigned such that the ratio determined in the second effect mode becomes higher in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and that the advantageous setting value is set by being executed in the second effect mode rather than in the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26(A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is “3”.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to a command being missed or data being garbled), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 012IWS511). Whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines that the set value is "1" and executes the pre-game suggestive effect using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26(A). The presence/absence and effect mode are determined (step 012IWS512). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS515.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS511 to S512, the feature unit 099IW is the most unfavorable setting value when the setting value command is not normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 8-26(A), with respect to the setting value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode is the lowest, and there is no case where it is determined as the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. However, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

If not the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 012IWS513). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the production mode C, the second production control CPU 012IW120b uses the pre-game suggestive production determination table for the production mode C to determine whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestive production and the production mode (step 012IWS514). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS515.

FIG. 8-26(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 8-26(B), in the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined to execute the pre-game suggestive effect as compared with the case of the setting values “2” and “3”. The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and there is no case where it is determined as the third effect mode.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS513 to S514, in the characteristic part 099IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is C, the disadvantageous setting value is set. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode and the player is rather discouraged, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 012IWS510, S512, and S514 (step 012IWS515). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS517.

On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b proceeds directly to step 012IWS516. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 012IWS513, in the feature unit 099IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is B, the pre-game suggestion production is not executed, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed to disappoint the player despite the disadvantageous set value being set, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of suggestive effect.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-26(A), and only in a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes, the executed ratio may be different depending on the set value. You may

In addition, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) out of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility that it is a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the set value 1, setting is performed when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) from being determined. The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and it is decided that the value is the setting value 2 or the setting value 3. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only when the setting value is 3, It is decided that the set value is 3.

In the feature part 099IW, it is possible to execute the pre-game suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestive effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, and second effect mode according to the set value. (Including 3 effect modes), the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode differ depending on the set value, and only the specific effect mode depends on the set value. This is a concept that includes different execution rates.

It should be noted that the present characteristic part 099IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect when the setting is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not been received yet. Not limited to this, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable even when the setting is not changed. In this case, the presence/absence of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing the effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

For example, FIG. 8-26(C) is a pre-game suggestive effect determination table used when a command for restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26(A) and the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26(C), when the command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change When not performed, the pre-game suggestive effect is executed at a lower rate and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is smaller than when the setting is changed. By doing so, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestive effect can be made different between when the setting is changed and when the setting is not changed.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 012IWS516).

When the process of step 012IWS516 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, an execution history indicating the number of times of execution of the setting suggestion effect (in-game suggestion effect or big hit suggestion effect), execution content (effect mode at the time of execution), and the like. A customer-waiting demonstration effect in which information is displayed is executed. When the processing of step 012IWS516 is executed, the customer waiting de-effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, The image display device 5 may display the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect. Further, on the side of the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, the number of executions and the content of execution of setting suggestion effects (initial appearance effects, pre-game suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, jackpot suggestion effects, etc.) It is also possible to store the information indicating (the effect mode at the time of execution), and to be able to execute the effect of inferring the set value from the information and informing. It should be noted that this effect notifies the expected setting value (or estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined reference from the execution situation of the setting suggestion effect, and does not notify the actual setting value. ..

In the feature part 099IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 012IWS508 to 012IWS515. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect is shown during the customer waiting demonstration effect by the process of step 012IWS516, but the information regarding the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game can be made to be interested, and the motivation to play the game can be given from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and the interest can be increased. .. Not limited to the example of the feature section 099IW, for example, by using the real-time clock 012IW126 or the like, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am). May be. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include information about the suggestion effect during game during the special period.

In addition to the configuration of the feature part 099IW, the number of executions and execution contents of the setting suggestion effect is accumulated as execution history information, and at the end of the game, the image display device 5 includes two-dimensional execution history information as described later. It may be configured to display a code or the like. In addition, when a player uses a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to photograph a two-dimensional code displayed on a gaming machine and sends it to a web server on the Internet, the web server uses the received information. You may make it manage the game history of a player, and perform the process which gives a predetermined privilege according to the game history. The player may access the Web server using the mobile terminal (or analyze the two-dimensional code) to acquire the execution history information and display the execution history information on the display device included in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information using the mobile terminal, so that the setting suggesting image suggesting the setting value may be displayed on the display device included in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined reference from the execution history information is calculated, and a setting suggestion image indicating the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. May be.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it is detected that the game end operation is performed by the player (step 012IWS517). For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B, confirms whether or not it has been detected that the game end option has been selected and the determination operation has been performed. .. If it is detected that the game ending operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b extracts log information from the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14, and the extracted log A two-dimensional code including information (for example, log information of a later-described probability change failure date and time) is generated (step 012IWS518). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to display the generated two-dimensional code on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS519), and ends the variable display start waiting process.

Although the characteristic part 099IW describes that an operation is performed as detection, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not directly input a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B. More specifically, first, the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are input on the side of the first effect control CPU 012IW120a, and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b passes through the first effect control CPU 012IW120a. A command indicating that the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B has been operated is input. This also applies to the other similar description portions in the feature part 099IW.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-27 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 012IWS601). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b displays the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read in step 012IWS601 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). (Stop symbol) is determined (step 012IWS602). That is, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the process of step 012IWS602 to display the display result (decorative pattern) of the variable identification information according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. The display result determining means for determining the stop pattern) is realized. It should be noted that the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores data indicating the determined stop design of the decorative design in the decorative design display result storage area. In step 012IWS602, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on only the variation pattern command. Good.

In step 012IWS602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variation big hit, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same odd number as a stop symbol. .. Further, for example, when the received display result designating command indicates a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same even number as a stop symbol. To decide.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b uses a combination of decorative designs of the small hit symbols according to the small hit type designated by the display result designation command. decide. In this example, in the case of the small hit type A, the combination of "135" is determined as the small hit symbol, and in the case of the small hit type B, the combination of "357" is determined as the small hit symbol, and the small hit. In the case of type C, the combination of "579" is determined as the small hit symbol.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a deviation, a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined.

When the pseudo pattern is specified by the variation pattern command, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, in step 012IWS602, is a chance eye symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo pattern. In this way, a combination of a jackpot pattern which is not a reach and a pattern in which one symbol is deviated) is also determined.

The second effect control CPU 012IW120b extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to stop the decorative symbol. Determine the design. That is, the stop design is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative designs corresponding to the numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b adds 1 to the value of the variation counter for counting the number of executions of variation display of decorative symbols after the game machine is powered on (step 012IWS603). In the characteristic part 099IW, the value of the variation counter is reset in the initialization process (step 012IWS201) when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and is changed when the game machine is powered on. It is assumed that the value starts from 0.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes in-game suggestion effect determination processing for determining the presence or absence of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 012IWS604).

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b selects the process table corresponding to the in-game suggestive effect if the variation pattern and the execution of the in-game suggestive effect are determined (step 012IWS605). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 012IWS606).

The process table is a table in which process data that the second effect control CPU 012IW120b refers to when executing control of the effect device is set. That is, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the effect devices (effect parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating the form of each variation constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern are described. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer set value is set with the change time in the form of the change. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 012IW121b of the second effect control board 012IW12b. The process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In the process table used when performing effect control for a variation pattern involving reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. It should be noted that instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated in accordance with the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect. May be.

When execution of the in-game suggestion effect is determined in the in-game suggestion effect determination process of step 012IWS604, a process table including the in-game suggestion effect is selected in step 012IWS605, and step 012IWS607 is selected according to the selected process table. And the effect display during variable display (step S172) is executed, so that the suggestion during game is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) effect device (image display device 5 as effect parts, effect parts. The various lamps and the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts are controlled (step 012IWS607).

In the characteristic part 099IW, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command in a one-to-one manner. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 012IWS608). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 012IWS609), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(During game suggestion production decision processing)
FIG. 8-28 is a flowchart of an example of in-game suggestive effect determination processing (step 012IWS604). The in-game suggestive effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, if the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is in the special period (Y in step 012IWS701), the second in-play suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 012IWS702), and in the special period. If not (N in step 012IWS701), the second in-game suggestive effect determination table is selected (step 012IWS703). For example, when the setting change end command or the setting value command is received, the special period flag is set, and when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag may be reset. For example, by checking the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm in step 012IWS701 whether it is during the special period.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS704). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Then, using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, the presence/absence of execution of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are determined (step 012IWS705).

FIG. 8-29(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first in-game suggestive effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 8-29(B) is a second in-game suggestive effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows a determination table.

In the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestive effect is executed in the order of the setting values “1”<“2”<“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the rate of being performed is high. With such a configuration, the suggestion during game is executed, so that it is suggested that the advantageous setting value is set.

As for the second effect mode (appearance of the mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the setting values “1”<“2”<“3” is high, and the first effect mode (appearance of the mini character A). The determination value is assigned such that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values is larger than that of the set value. That is, the second effect mode has higher reliability with respect to the setting value being more advantageous than the first effect mode.

Further, in the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestive effect having a high reliability is executed only in the special period. Is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-29(A) and (B), the third effect mode (character C appears) may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting value is "3".

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to a command being missed or data being garbled), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 012IWS706). Whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the production mode A, the second production control CPU 012IW120b determines that the set value is "1" and uses the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table to determine whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode. (Step 012IWS707).

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS706 to S707, in the feature unit 099IW, the setting value which is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 8-29(A) and (B), for the set value “1”, the rate of determining to execute the in-game suggestive effect is low and the rate of being determined as the second effect mode. Is the lowest, and there is no case where it is determined to be the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the suggestion during game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. However, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

If not the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 012IWS708). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b uses the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 012IWS709).

FIG. 8-29(C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the in-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 8-29(C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the proportion determined to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the setting value “3”. There is no case where it is determined to be the third effect mode.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS708 to S709, in the characteristic part 099IW, when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is C, the disadvantageous setting value is set. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the in-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the in-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the processing of step 012IWS708, in the present feature part 099IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode B, the in-game suggestion production is not executed, Even if a disadvantageous set value is set, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by executing the suggestive effect during game, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the in-game suggestion effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the in-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the in-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B) is used. Then, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of in-game suggestive effect.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 8-29(A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The ratio may be different.

In addition, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) out of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility that it is a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the set value 1, setting is performed when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) from being determined. The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and it is decided that the value is the setting value 2 or the setting value 3. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only when the setting value is 3, It is decided that the set value is 3.

In the present feature section 099IW, it is possible to execute in-game suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set value, but this is in-game suggestion effects (first effect mode, second effect mode, and second effect mode). (Including 3 effect modes), the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode differ depending on the set value, and only the specific effect mode depends on the set value. This is a concept that includes different execution rates.

It should be noted that the characteristic part 099IW is configured to be able to execute the in-game suggestion effect in a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, but is not limited to such a configuration. Alternatively, a different mode suggestive effect during game may be executable. For example, the size and color of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

In addition, the present feature section 099IW is configured such that the presence/absence of execution of in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are different depending on whether it is a special period or a non-special period and a set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the variation time specified by the variation pattern, the presence/absence of the reach effect, the type of the reach effect, the presence/absence of the pseudo continuous effect, the type of the pseudo continuous effect, and the display result become a big hit. Depending on whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed, the effect mode when executing may be different.

For example, the in-game suggestion effect may be executable only at least when the variation pattern includes the reach effect (that is, the variation time is longer than that of the non-reach variation pattern). Further, for example, in the variation pattern including the super reach B and the variation pattern including the super reach A having a higher degree of expectation than the super reach B, the latter has a higher ratio of executing the suggestion during game. Alternatively, the reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the in-game suggestion effect is executed is high, and the reliability when the in-game suggestive effect is executed is high. It may be higher.

Further, for example, in a variation pattern including a pseudo-relational effect and a variation pattern that does not include a pseudo-relational effect (or the number of pseudo-repetition times is smaller than that in the former), the former is more likely to perform the in-game suggestive effect. It may be set higher, the reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed may be higher, or the rate at which the in-game suggestion effect is executed becomes higher and The reliability may be increased.

Further, for example, in the variation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and in the variation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may be configured to have a higher ratio in which the in-game suggestive effect is executed. The reliability when the medium suggestive effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestive effect is executed may be increased and the reliability when the intermediate suggestive effect is executed may be increased. ..

(Direction determination process during big hit)
FIG. 8-30 is a flowchart showing an example of a big hit mid-game effect determination process. The big hit midtime performance determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S114). In the big hit mid-game effect determination process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS901). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Then, the presence/absence of execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect and the effect mode when the effect is executed are determined (step 012IWS902). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS907.

In step S012IWS902, in the case of a period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the process shown in FIG. When the one big hit medium suggestion effect determination table is selected, and when it is not during the specific period, the second big hit medium suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-31(B) is selected. Then, based on the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table and the set value, the presence/absence of execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are determined. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but it is not limited to this, and for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the last game. It may be the time when the display is started, or the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. Further, in this characteristic unit 099IW, the period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as the specific period regardless of whether the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the game start time to the variable display being performed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as the specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and a first specific period (a period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed 50 times) and a second specific period (the 51st change after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a big hit medium suggestive effect determination table in which the presence or absence of the big hit medium suggestive effect and the determination rate of the effect mode are different between the display and the 100th variation display).

In the first and second big hit medium suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-31(A) and (B), the big hit medium suggestive effect is executed in the order of the setting values “1”<“2”<“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the rate of being performed is high. With such a configuration, the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, which suggests that the advantageous setting value is set.

Further, in the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” is high, and the execution ratio between the set values in the specific period and the non-specific period is high. The determination value is assigned so that the difference between the two becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the big hit medium suggestion effect having higher reliability than the non-specific period is configured to be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to give an incentive to play a game in a specific period, and enhance the interest. Not limited to the configuration of the characteristic part 099IW, the suggestion during big hit (or a particular aspect of the effect) may be executed only during a specific period and not during a non-specific period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-31(A) and (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, it is determined that the set value is "3" by executing the big hit medium suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode.

In the present feature part 099IW, when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed in the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (A1), the decorative pattern to be a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B1), a dialogue C image (“high setting!?”) 012IW102 is displayed.

Further, when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (A1), after the decorative pattern which is a big hit is stopped and displayed, the figure is displayed. As shown in 8-44 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 012IW105 is displayed.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to a command being missed or data being garbled), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS903). Whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines that the setting value is "1" and uses the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table to determine whether or not to execute the big hit medium suggestion effect. (Step 012IWS904). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS907.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS903 to S904, the present feature unit 099IW is the most unfavorable setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not to execute the suggestion during big hit and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 8-31(A) and (B), the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest with respect to the setting value “1”, and is determined as the fourth effect mode. There is no case. With such a configuration, despite the disadvantageous set value being set, the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player. It is possible to prevent the situation that the player loses interest in playing games.

If not the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 012IWS905). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not to execute the big hit medium suggestion effect and the effect mode by using the big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 012IWS906). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS907.

FIG. 8-31(C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 8-31(C), in the big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, when the set value “2” or “3” is set, the rate itself for determining that the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed is low. Compared with, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is low, and there is no case where it is determined as the fourth effect mode.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS905 to S906, in the characteristic part 099IW, if the set value command cannot be received normally and the production mode C is set, a disadvantageous set value is set. It is possible to prevent a situation where the big hit medium suggestion production is executed by the second production aspect, the third production aspect, and the third production aspect to cause the player to be discouraged, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b proceeds directly to step 012IWS907. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted so as not to execute the suggestive effect during the big hit.

By executing the processing of step 012IWS905, in the feature unit 099IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is B, by not executing the big hit medium suggestion production, Even if a disadvantageous set value is set, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the big hit medium suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the big hit medium suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. 8-31(A) and (B) is used. Then, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of suggestive effect during the big hit.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 8-31(A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The ratio may be different.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-31(A), when a big hit occurs in a specific period, a suggestion effect during a big hit is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. May be. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be changed according to the set value. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-31(B), regardless of the set value, the proportion in which the big hit suggestive effect is not executed is configured to be the same, but if the proportion not executed is different according to the set value. You may allow it.

In addition, in the feature part 099IW, when a big hit occurs in a specific period, a big hit medium suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, The setting suggestion effect (for example, a dialogue image suggesting the set value is displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied) may be executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition in the specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, or when a specific super reach effect or a notice effect is executed.

In the feature part 099IW, the big hit medium suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value, but this is the big hit medium suggestive effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third effect mode). Execution ratio of the production mode and the fourth production mode) is different, the execution ratio of the first production mode, the second production mode, the third production mode and the fourth production mode is different according to the set value, the set value It is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, a third effect mode) according to the above.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 012IWS907).

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (A1), it is assumed that the movable member 012IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, control for moving the movable member 012IW101 to the front surface of the image display device 5 is performed as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B2).

As shown in FIGS. 8-43 (A1) and (B2), when the accessory production is executed, the movable member 012IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5, so that the image display device 5 produces a big hit medium suggestion. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the position where the serif image is displayed. In the present feature part 099IW, since the big hit medium suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at different timings during the fanfare period in the big hit game, the movable member 012IW101 actually moved to the front surface of the image display device 5 is a big hit. The serif image displayed by the medium suggestion is not covered. However, during the fanfare period, when the movable member 012IW101 operates due to the effect production, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 012IW101 and the dialogue image displayed by the big hit suggestion production may be overlooked. Therefore, in step 012IWS907, the character effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-31(D) is used so that the character effect is not executed when the big hit suggestion effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestive effect during the big hit from being difficult to recognize and reduce the interest. Also, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the big hit mid-hugging suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize even if the big hit mid-hit suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing.

In addition, when the execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect is determined, the execution timing of either the big hit medium suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect effect is performed in the fanfare period, and the big hit medium effect effect is generated. It may be possible to prevent the suggestive effect during a big hit from being difficult to recognize. Further, when the execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect is determined, the operation mode of the movable member 012IW101 is changed (for example, control is performed so as not to stop at a position overlapping the serif image by the big hit medium suggestion effect), or the big hit. The display position of the serif image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit medium suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize. Further, when the execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is determined, the execution ratio of the accessory effect may be reduced to limit the execution of the accessory effect. In addition, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-31(D), the accessory effect may be executed at a low rate even when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed.

Next, when the accessory effect is not executed (N in step 012IWS908), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines the presence/absence of the light guide plate effect (step 012IWS909).

Here, on the front surface of the image display device 5, a light guide plate 012IW103 having a light-transmitting property that allows light to pass therethrough, and a light-emitting body provided so that light can enter from the end surface of the light guide plate are provided. It is assumed that a light emitting member is provided with a reflection portion that reflects the light that has entered the inside of the light guide plate 012IW103 from the end face of the light guide plate 012IW103 and emits the light to the front surface of the game machine. Then, it is possible to execute a light guide plate effect in which light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 012IW103 to the front surface of the game machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B3), light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 012IW103 to the front surface of the game machine, so that the “big hit” occurs. Appears. Further, during execution of the light guide plate effect, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5.

In step 012IWS909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-31(E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios according to the presence or absence of the big hit medium suggestion effect and the effect mode when it is executed. It Specifically, when the suggestion during big hit in the first effect mode is performed, the ratio of the light guide plate effect being executed is high, and the suggestion during big hit in the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode. When the effect is executed, the ratio of the light guide plate effect executed is reduced. That is, when a big hit medium suggestion effect of an effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the big hit medium suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to visually recognize. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B4), when the dialogue A image (“setting is...”) 012IW104 is displayed in the big hit medium suggestion effect of the first effect mode, the light guide plate effect is executed. If so, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the serif A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having a bad interest in the game due to the suggestion during the big hit in the form of the effect which is not desirable for the player. In addition, when the big hit medium suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the big hit medium suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate. The effect may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestion during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

(Ending production process)
8-32 is a flowchart showing the ending effect process (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the ending effect process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first decrements the value of the effect period measurement timer by 1 (step 012IWS951). The production period measurement timer is set based on the fact that all the rounds of the big hit game have been completed in the big hit midway production process (see step S176). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 012IWS952).

When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 012IWS952), the second production control CPU 012IW120b subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 012IWS953), and the production device (image display) according to the contents of the process data n. A process for controlling the device 5, the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. is executed (step 012IWS954). For example, an effect of displaying that the jackpot is over or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 012IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 012IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 012IWS957).

If the production period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 012IWS952), the second production control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the jackpot game to be finished this time is a jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot (step 012IW958). Whether or not the probability variation is a big hit can be determined by, for example, checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is not the probability variation big hit (N in step 012IW958), the process directly proceeds to step 012IWS961.

If the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is finished (Y in step 012IWS958), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the V winning designation command is received (step 012IWS959). If the V winning designation command has been received (Y in step 012IWS959), the process directly proceeds to step 012IWS961.

If the V winning designation command has not been received (N in step 012IWS959), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and the input date and time information is used as the probability change failure date and time to back up the backup memory substrate 099IW14. The log information is stored in the log areas provided in the data memories 099IW210A to 210D (step 012IWS960). That is, in this case, the second special variable winning a prize device 012IW007b is controlled for a big hit game based on the probability variation big hit, and the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened for a relatively long time (29.5 seconds in this example). Since it is a case where the game ball does not win the V winning area in the special variable winning device 012IW007b and is not controlled to the probability variation state, the log information is recorded as the probability variation non-establishment date and time. Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS961.

After that, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b updates the value of the effect process flag to "0" (step 012IWS961), and ends the ending effect process.

In this example, the case where the probability variation failure is detected and the log information is recorded in the ending period at the end of the big hit game is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in this example, since the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened in the fourth round during the big hit game, at the end of the fourth round (when closing the second special variable winning device 012IW007b after the fourth round). Alternatively, during the fifth round after the fourth round (while the second special variable winning device 012IW007b of the fifth round is open), it may be configured to detect whether or not the probability variation is not established and record the log information. Good.

(Error notification process)
8-33 to 8-36 are flowcharts showing the error notification process (step 012IWS210). In the error notification process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first checks whether or not the first left-handing notification flag indicating that the first left-handing notification is being executed is set (step 012IWS101). If the first left-handing notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not the second left-handing notification flag indicating that the second left-handing notification is being executed is set. Confirm (step 012IWS102).

If the second left-handing notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not a big hit game is in progress (step 012IWS103). Whether or not it is during the big hit game, for example, the value of the effect process flag updated in the effect control process process is a value indicating the effect process during the big hit (step S176) to the ending effect process (step S177). It can be determined by checking whether or not there is. If the big hit game is not in progress, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it is in the high base state (step 012IWS104). Whether or not the high base state is in effect is checked, for example, whether or not a command (for example, a probability variation state background designation command, a time saving state background designation command) capable of specifying that the high base state is in progress is received. It can be determined by doing.

If it is not in the high base state (that is, if it is in the low base state), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the gate passage designation command is received (step 012IWS105). If the gate passage designation command is received (that is, if passage of the game ball of the passage gate 012IW041 is detected), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b counts the number of game balls that have passed the passage gate 012IW041. 1 is added to the value of the gate passage counter (step 012IWS106), and it is confirmed whether or not the value of the gate passage counter after addition is 5 (step 012IWS107).

If the value of the gate passage counter is 5, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start displaying the left-handed notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS108). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying a character display such as "Aim for the left!" Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the first left-handing notification flag (step 012IWS109). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (5 seconds in this example) in the first left-handing notification timer for measuring the execution period of the first left-handing notification (step) (step 012IWS110). That is, in this case, it is a case where the left hitting operation is originally performed because it is in the low base state and not in the big hit game, but the total passing of the game balls to the passing gate 012IW041 provided in the right area of the game area is totaled. Since it is detected that the right-handed operation has been performed five times, the first left-handed notification for urging the player to perform the left-handed operation is performed.

If the value of the gate passage counter after addition is not 5, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether the value of the gate passage counter after addition is 10 (step 012IWS111). If the value of the gate passage counter is 10, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start displaying the left-handed notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS112). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying a character display such as "Aim for the left!" In this case, for example, a larger left-handed notification display may be displayed as compared with the case where the first left-handed notification is executed. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start all lighting of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS113). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start output of a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS114). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the second left-handing notification flag (step 012IWS115). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (in this example, 33 seconds) in a second left-handing notification timer for measuring the execution period of the second left-handing notification (step). 012IWS116). That is, in this case, when the base state is low and the big hit game is not being performed, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 012IW041 further provided in the right area of the game area is detected 10 times in total. Therefore, the second left-handing notification that prompts the player to perform the left-handing operation is performed. If the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is set, the first left-handing notification flag and the first left-handing notification timer are reset.

In addition, in this example, the execution condition of the second left-handed notification is established based on the fact that the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 012IW041 is detected 10 times in total, whereas the execution condition of the second left-handed notification is established, while the game ball to the passage gate 012IW041 is Since the execution condition of the first left-handling notification is satisfied based on the detection of the passage of a total of 5 times, the second left-handing notification of the second left-handing notification is established based on the satisfaction of the two execution conditions of the first left-handing notification. The execution condition is satisfied.

In addition, in this example, the case where the execution condition of the left-handed notification is established on the basis of the fact that the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 012IW041 is detected 5 or 10 times in total is shown. It is not limited to various forms. For example, when the second starting winning opening is provided in the right area of the game ball, if the winning of the gaming ball into the second starting winning opening is detected even once, the left-handed notification execution condition is satisfied. Alternatively, the left-handed notification may be executed.

Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and uses the input date and time information as the left-handing notification date and time in the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Is stored (step 012IWS117). As described above, in the present example, there are two types of left-handing notification, that is, the first left-handing notification and the second left-handing notification, but only when the second left-handing notification having higher importance is executed, the log is output. The log information is not recorded when the first left-handed notification is recorded in the information and the importance thereof is low.

If the gate passage designation command is not received (N of step 012IWS105, that is, if passage of the game ball of the passage gate 012IW041 is detected, is the second effect control CPU 012IW120b receiving the winning opening winning designation command? If the winning award winning designation command is received (that is, if the winning of the game ball to the general award winning opening 10 is detected), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, The value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 (step 012IWS119) That is, the fact that the winning a prize winning designation command is received means that the winning of the game ball to the general winning a prize opening 10 provided in the left area of the playing area. Is detected, and the player is performing a left-handed operation, so the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to zero.

Also, when the big hit game (Y in step 012IWS103) or in the high base state (Y in step 012IWS104), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b moves to step 012IWS119 and the gate passage counter The value is cleared to 0 (step 012IWS119). In other words, the fact that the player is in the big hit game or in the high base state means that the right hitting operation is performed, so the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to zero.

If the first left-handing notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS101), that is, if the first left-handing notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b notifies the first left-handing notification. It is confirmed whether or not the timer has timed out (step 012IWS120). If the first left-handing notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to end the display of the left-handing notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS121). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the first left-handing notification flag (step 012IWS122).

If the second left-handing notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS102), that is, if the second left-handing notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b causes the second left-handing notification to be performed. It is confirmed whether or not the timer has timed out (step 012IWS123). If the second left-handing notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control for ending the display of the left-handing notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS124). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control for ending all lights of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS125), and also performs control for ending output of a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS126). ). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the second left-handing notification flag (step 012IWS127). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b clears the value of the gate passage counter to 0 (step 012IWS128).

In this example, the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 10 is detected, the big hit game is being performed, the high base state is being set, and the second left-handing notification period (33 seconds) is set. Although the case where the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 based on the elapsed time is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 on the basis of the fact that the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 10 is detected, the big hit game is being performed, and the base state is being high, while the second The value of the gate passage counter may not be cleared even after the notification period (33 seconds) for left-handed notification has elapsed, and various processing modes are possible.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the first full tank notification flag indicating that the first full tank notification is being executed is set (step 012IWS129). If the first full tank notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not the second full tank notification flag indicating that the second full tank notification is being executed is set. Confirm (step 012IWS130).

If the second full tank notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether the full tank detection command is received (step 012IWS131). When the full tank detection command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not the full tank flag indicating that the full state of the hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is being detected is set. Confirm (step 012IWS132). If the full tank flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the full tank flag (step 012IWS133), and measures the duration time of the full supply state of the hitting ball supply plate (lower plate). A full tank timer is set (step 012IWS134).

If the full tank flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether the value of the full timer is 10 seconds (step 012IWS135). If the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 10 seconds (that is, if the hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is in a full tank state for 10 seconds), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, The image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying the full tank notification display (step 012IWS136). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying a character display such as "the lower plate is full!". Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the first full tank notification flag (step 012IWS137). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (5 seconds in this example) in the first full tank notification timer for measuring the execution period of the first full tank notification (step). 012IWS138).

If the value of the full tank timer is not a value corresponding to 10 seconds, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 30 seconds (step 012IWS139). ). If the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 30 seconds (that is, if the hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is full for 30 seconds), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, The image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying the full tank notification display (step 012IWS140). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying a character display such as "the lower plate is full!". In this case, for example, a larger full tank notification display may be displayed as compared with the case of executing the first full tank notification. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start all lighting of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS141). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start outputting a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS142). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the second full tank notification flag (step 012IWS143). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (33 seconds in this example) in the second full tank notification timer for measuring the execution period of the second full tank notification (step). 012IWS 144). The second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the first full tank notification flag and the first full tank notification timer if set.

In this example, when the second full tank notification is executed, all the game effect lamps 9 and a predetermined notification sound are output as in the case of executing the second left-handed notification. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, either one of all the game effect lamps 9 or a predetermined alarm sound may be output, or only a part of the game effect lamps 9 may be turned on. Good.

Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and uses the input date and time information as the full notification date and time in the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Is stored (step 012IWS145). As described above, in this example, there are two types of full tank notifications, the first full tank notification and the second full tank notification, but only when the second full tank notification having high importance is executed The log information is not recorded when the first full tank notification, which is recorded in the information and has low importance, is executed.

On the other hand, if the full tank detection command is not received (step 012IWS131, N), that is, if the full state of the hitting ball supply tray (lower plate) is not detected, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is set. For example, the full tank flag is reset and the full timer is reset (step 012IWS146).

When the first full tank notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS129), that is, when the first full tank notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b causes the first full tank notification. It is confirmed whether or not the timer has timed out (step 012IWS147). If the first full tank notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to end the display of the full tank notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS148). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the first full tank notification flag (step 012IWS149).

When the second full tank notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS130), that is, when the second full tank notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b outputs the second full tank notification. It is confirmed whether or not the timer has timed out (step 012IWS150). If the second full tank notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to end the display of the left-handed notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS151). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control for ending all lights of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS152), and also performs control for ending output of a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L, 8R (step 012IWS153). ). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the second full tank notification flag (step 012IWS154). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the full tank flag and resets the full tank timer (step 012IWS155).

(Maintenance mode processing)
FIG. 8-37 is a flowchart showing the maintenance mode process (step 012IWS211). In the maintenance mode process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not the maintenance mode flag indicating that the maintenance mode is being set is set (step 012IWS451). If the maintenance mode flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (step 012IWS452).

If the setting confirmation flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting confirmation command is received (step 012IWS453). If the setting confirmation command has been received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start displaying the setting confirmation display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS454). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying a character display such as “setting confirmation in progress”. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the setting confirmation flag (step 012IWS455).

If the setting confirmation flag is set (Y in step 012IWS452), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether the push button 31B is turned on (specifically, the detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input. Check) (step 012IWS456). If the push button 31B is turned on, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start displaying the maintenance mode menu screen on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS457). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the maintenance mode flag (step 012IWS458).

As described above, by performing the processing of steps 012IWS452 to S458, in this example, the maintenance operation is performed based on the push button 31B being pressed while confirming the setting when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. The mode is controlled, and the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed.

If the push button 31B is not turned on (N in step 012IWS456), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the command for restoration is received (step 012IWS459). If the command for restoration is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control for ending the display of the setting confirmation display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS460). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the setting confirmation flag (step 012IWS461). That is, the fact that the command for restoration is received during the setting confirmation means that the player turns off the setting key 012IW051 and the setting confirmation process ends (N in step 012IWS043, see step 012IWS049). Control to end the display of the confirmation display.

If the maintenance mode flag is set (Y in step 012IWS451), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the player has performed maintenance history selection operation (step 012IWS462). .. For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the maintenance history selection operation is detected based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b extracts all log information from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 (step 012IWS463). Strictly speaking, in step 012IWS463, only the log information for the gaming machine is read, and the log information for the gaming machine maker is not read. Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to display a maintenance history screen including the extracted log information as history information (step 012IWS464).

If the maintenance history selection operation has not been detected (N in step 012IWS462), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it is detected that the setting change/confirmation history selection operation has been performed by the player ( Step 012IWS465). For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting change/confirmation history selection operation is detected based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the setting change/confirmation history selection operation is performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the log information stored in the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. All log information for setting change and setting confirmation is extracted (step 012IWS466). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to display a setting change/confirmation history screen including the extracted setting change and setting confirmation log information as history information (step 012IWS467).

If it is not detected that the setting change/confirmation history selection operation is performed (N in step 012IWS465), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the command for restoration is received (step 012IWS468). .. If the command for restoration is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to erase the maintenance mode menu screen, the maintenance history screen, and the setting change/confirmation history screen in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS469). .. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the maintenance mode flag (step 012IWS470). That is, the fact that the command for restoration is received during the setting confirmation means that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the player and the setting confirmation process ends (N in step 012IWS043, see step 012IWS049). Performs control to end the mode.

In this example, the case where the setting key 012IW051 is determined to be turned off based on the reception of the command for restoration and the maintenance mode is ended is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in this example, since the setting value command is also transmitted when the setting key 012IW051 is turned off (see step 012IWS047), it is determined that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off based on the reception of the setting value command, and the maintenance mode is set. May be configured to end.

(Setting change time recording process)
FIG. 8-38 is a flowchart of the setting change time recording process (step 012IWS212). In the setting change time recording process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not a setting change command has been received (step 012IWS801). If the setting change command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126 and sets the input date and time information as the setting change start date and time in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. The log information is stored in the provided log area (step 012IWS802). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a setting change command reception flag indicating that the setting change command has been received (step 012IWS803).

If the setting change command has not been received (N in step 012IWS801), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting confirmation command has been received (step 012IWS804). If the setting confirmation command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126 and sets the input date and time information as the setting confirmation start date and time in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. The log information is stored in the provided log area (step 012IWS805). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a setting confirmation command reception flag indicating that the setting confirmation command has been received (step 012IWS806).

If the setting confirmation command has not been received (N in step 012IWS804), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the initialization designation command has been received (step 012IWS807). If the initialization designation command has been received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting change command reception flag is set (step 012IWS808). If the setting change command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process is not executed and only the initialization process is executed), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b outputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126. Is input and the log information is stored in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW 210A to 210D of the backup memory substrate 099IW14 using the entered date and time information as the RAM clear date and time (step 012IWS809).

On the other hand, if the setting change command reception flag is not set (Y in step 012IWS808), that is, if both the setting change process and the initialization process are executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the set value in the RAM012IW122b. The current setting value stored in the area is read (step 012IWS810). In this example, when the setting change process is executed, the setting value command is transmitted before the initialization designation command (see steps 012IWS047 and S052), so the setting value storage area of the RAM012IW122b has the latest value. The setting value of should be stored. Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, associates it with the read setting value, and sets the input date and time information as the setting change end date and time in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D. The log information is stored in the log area provided in (step 012IWS811). The second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the setting change command reception flag that has been set.

In this example, the processing of steps 012IWS810 and S811 causes the initialization processing to be executed when the setting change processing is executed, but only the log information regarding the setting change is recorded. However, by omitting the recording of the log information regarding the RAM clear, it is possible to prevent the log information from being unnecessarily recorded.

If the initialization command has not been received (N in step 012IWS807), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the restoration command has been received (step 012IWS812). If the command for restoration is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting confirmation command reception flag is set (step 012IWS813). If the setting confirmation command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting confirmation process is not executed and only the restoration process is executed), the process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if the setting confirmation command reception flag is not set (step 012IWS813 Y), that is, if both the setting confirmation process and the restoration process are executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the setting value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. The current setting value stored in is read (step 012IWS814). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, associates it with the read setting value, and sets the input date and time information as the setting confirmation end date and time in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory substrate 099IW14. The log information is stored in the log area provided in (step 012IWS815). The second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the setting confirmation command reception flag that has been set.

In this example, when the setting confirmation process is not executed and only the recovery process is executed, the log information is not recorded, but the log information may be recorded. In this case, for example, when the result is N in step 012IWS813, the date and time information is input from the real-time clock 012IW126, and the input date and time information is used as the recovery date and time in the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. It may be configured to store information.

(Current time setting process)
FIG. 8-39 is a flowchart showing the current time setting process (step 012IWS213). In the current time setting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not the maintenance mode flag is set (step 012IWS821). If the maintenance mode flag is set (that is, in the maintenance mode), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether the current time setting flag indicating that the current time is being set is set. It is confirmed (step 012IWS822).

If the current time setting flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it has been detected that the player has performed the current time setting selection operation (step 012IWS823). For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms, based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B, whether or not the current time setting selection operation is detected. If it is detected that the current time setting selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start displaying the current time setting screen on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS824). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the present time setting flag (step 012IWS825).

If the current time setting flag is set (Y in step 012IWS822), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is set to the standby flag indicating that it is on standby until the current time setting log information is recorded. It is confirmed whether or not (step 012IWS826). If the standby flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the hour signal has been received from the first effect control CPU 012IW120a (step 012IWS827).

In this example, as already described, the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are first input to the first effect control CPU 012IW120a, so that the player operates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. When the setting information of the current time is input, a signal capable of specifying the input setting information of the current time is sequentially transmitted from the first effect control CPU 012IW120a to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. In this case, in this example, the hour signal indicating the set input time, the minute signal indicating the minute, the second signal indicating the second, the year signal indicating the year, the month signal indicating the month, the day signal indicating the day, and the day of the week are set. The signals are transmitted in the order of the indicated day signals. Further, in the present example, as already described, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a generates a timer interrupt every 10 ms, and these signals are transmitted every 10 ms.

If the hour signal has been received (Y in step 012IWS827), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the time information of the real-time clock 012IW126 at the time indicated by the received hour signal (step 012IWS828). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to 500 ms to a waiting timer for measuring a waiting period until recording the log information of the current time setting (step 012IWS829). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a standby flag (step 012IWS830).

If the standby flag is set (Y in step 012IWS826), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the standby timer has timed out (step 012IWS831). If the waiting timer has not timed out, has the second effect control CPU 012IW120b received any one of a minute signal, a second signal, an year signal, a month signal, a day signal, and a day of the week signal from the first effect control CPU 012IW120a. It is confirmed whether or not (step 012IWS832).

If any of the signals is received (Y in step 012IWS832), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 to the information indicated by the received signal (step 012IWS833). For example, when the minute signal is received, the minute information of the real time clock 012IW126 is set to the minute indicated by the received minute signal. Further, for example, when the second signal is received, the second information of the real time clock 012IW126 is set to the second indicated by the received second signal. Further, for example, when the year signal is received, the year information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the year indicated by the received year signal. Further, for example, when the month signal is received, the month information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the month indicated by the received month signal. Further, for example, when the date signal is received, the date information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the date indicated by the received date signal. Further, for example, when the day of the week signal is received, the day of the week information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the day of the week indicated by the received day of the week signal.

If the waiting timer has timed out (Y in step 012IWS831), that is, if 500 ms has elapsed since the first time signal was received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b outputs the hour, minute, and time from the real-time clock 012IW126. The date and time information of the second, year, month, day, and day of the week is read (step 012IWS834). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the log information in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory substrate 099IW14 using the read date and time information as the time set date and time (step 012IWS835). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the current time setting flag and the standby flag (step 012IWS836).

FIG. 8-40 is an explanatory diagram for describing the setting timing of the current time. When the player operates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to set the current time, the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are first input to the first effect control CPU 012IW120a. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-40, according to the setting operation by the player, the hour signal, the minute signal, the second signal, the year signal, the month signal, the day signal, and the day of the week signal are for the first effect control every 10 ms. It is sequentially transmitted from the CPU 012IW120a to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b.

Upon receiving these signals, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b immediately sets the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 based on the received signals, as shown in FIG. 8-40. As shown in FIG. 8-40, when the hour signal is received, the hour information of the real time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received hour signal. When the minute signal is received 10 ms after that, the minute information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received minute signal. When the second signal is received 10 ms after that, the second information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received second signal. When the year signal is received 10 ms after that, the year information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received year signal. When the month signal is received 10 ms after that, the month information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received month signal. When the date signal is received 10 ms after that, the date information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received date signal. Furthermore, when a day-of-week signal is received 10 ms after that, the day-of-week information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received day-of-week signal.

On the other hand, the log information of the time setting date and time is not immediately recorded, but the waiting timer is set when the first time signal is received, the waiting timer times out, and as shown in FIG. After waiting for 500 ms after receiving the signal, the date and time information from the real time clock 012IW126 is read and recorded in the log information as the time set date and time.

In addition, when the player further operates the current time setting before 500 ms has elapsed after receiving the hour signal, another hour signal, minute signal, second signal, or the like before 500 ms elapses. The information of the real-time clock 012IW126 may be set by receiving the year signal, the month signal, the day signal, and the day of the week signal, but in this example, the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set whenever the signals are received. Therefore, the log information of the time set date and time is recorded based on the date and time information of the real time clock 012IW126 set based on the last received signal.

If you record the hourly signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, and day-of-the-week signal that are individually transmitted as log information, the log information of the current time setting becomes redundant more than necessary. However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-40, the log information of the time setting date and time is recorded after waiting until all the signals related to the time setting are received. It prevents it from becoming redundant.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, the case where the first effect control CPU 012IW120a to which the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are primarily input is provided is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, an input circuit to which a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is input is provided, and the hour signal, the minute signal, the second signal, the year signal, the month signal, the day signal, and the day of the week signal are sequentially output from the input circuit. It may be configured to be transmitted to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. It may be configured in such a manner that a signal according to an operation is transmitted in some form to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b in sequence.

In addition, in this example, the case where the real-time clock 012IW126 is mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b side is shown. Accordingly, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a side may be configured to update the date and time information of the real-time clock at any time. Then, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a transmits the updated real-time clock date and time information to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b updates the counter and the like based on the received date and time information. May be configured to be managed.

(Recording date and time of power interruption)
FIG. 8-41 is a flowchart of the power interruption date/time recording process (step 012IWS214). In the power interruption date and time recording process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not a temporary storage enable flag indicating that temporary storage of the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126 is set (step 012IWS841). ). If the temporary storage enable flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether the temporary storage timer for measuring the time for temporarily storing the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126 has timed out ( Step 012IWS842). If the temporary storage timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b reads the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the read date and time information in the temporary area provided in the RAM 012IW122b (step 012IWS843). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to 100 ms in the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

Although the date and time information is stored in the temporary area of the RAM012IW122b every 100 ms, if the previous date and time information is stored in the temporary area, new date and time information is temporarily overwritten every 100 ms. It shall be stored in the area.

If the temporary storage enable flag is not set (N in step 012IWS841), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the initialization designation command or the command for restoration is received (step 012IWS845). If the initialization designation command or the command at the time of restoration is received, the second production control CPU 012IW120b stores the log information of the last power-on date and time in the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Is stored (step 012IWS846). If the log information of the last power-on date and time is not stored (N in step 012IWS846), the process proceeds to step 012IWS849. If the log information of the previous power-on date and time is stored (Y in step 012IWS846), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b reads the date and time information stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW122b and disconnects the read date and time information. As the date and time, the log information is stored in the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 (step 012IWS847). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS849.

If neither the initialization designation command nor the command at the time of restoration is received (N in step 012IWS845), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b turns on other commands (however, power-on such as setting confirmation command and setting change command). It is confirmed whether or not a command (which is sometimes transmitted) is received (step 012IWS848). If another command is received, for example, if a variation pattern command or a display result designation command is received, the process proceeds to step 012IWS849.

In Step 012IWS849, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the temporary storage enable flag (Step 012IWS849). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to 100 ms in the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

In addition, when the temporary storage enable flag is set in step 012IWS849, it is maintained until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped or the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs. Then, when the effect control main processing shown in FIG. 8-18 is started due to occurrence of power-on of the gaming machine, system reset, or the like, it is reset by the initialization processing of step 012IWS201.

FIG. 8-42 is an explanatory diagram for describing the recording timing of the log information of the power cut date and time. As shown in FIG. 8-42, when the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is activating the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, it is determined as Y in step 012IWS841 of the power interruption date and time recording process, and steps 012IWS842 to S844. By executing the processing of (1), the date and time information is temporarily stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b every 100 ms.

Next, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped or the system for the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is reset, the initialization process (see step 012IWS201) is executed, and the temporary storage enable flag is reset, the second effect control Even when the CPU 012IW120b for use returns to the activated state, it is determined as N in step 012IWS841 of the power interruption date/time recording process, the temporary storage of the date/time information for every 100 ms is not executed, and it is finally stored in the temporary area of the RAM012IW122b. Date and time information is maintained.

If the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then the power supply to the gaming machine is started, at least the initialization designation command or the command at the time of restoration should be received. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-42(1), the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is read out on condition that the initialization designation command or the command at the time of restoration is received, and the read out date and time. The log information is stored in the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory substrate 099IW14 using the information as the power cut date and time (Y in step 012IWS845, see step 012IWS847). Then, after that, the temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of the date and time information for every 100 ms is restarted (see steps 012IWS849 and S850). However, in this example, although the log information of the power-on date and time is also recorded (see step 012IWS203), if the log information of the power-on date and time before the occurrence of the power failure is not recorded, Since there is a possibility that some abnormality has occurred, in this case, the log information of the power interruption date and time is configured not to be recorded (see N in step 012IWS846).

On the other hand, if a system reset or the like of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs, it does not mean that the power supply to the gaming machine itself has stopped, but an initialization designation command or a command for restoration from the gaming control microcomputer 100. The power-on command is not sent. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-42(2), when the initialization designation command and the command at the time of restoration are not received, it is determined that the gaming machine itself has not been cut off. The log information is controlled so that the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is used as the power cut date and time. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-42(2), based on the reception of other commands (excluding the commands transmitted at power-on such as the setting confirmation command and the setting change command), for example, On the basis of the reception of the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, etc., the temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of the date and time information every 100 ms is restarted (see steps 012IWS849 and S850).

If the log information of the power interruption date and time is recorded only based on the detection of the stop on the side of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, when the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs ( 2 When the power supply of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is temporarily stopped due to a system reset or the like of the CPU 012IW120b for effect control), the log information of the power interruption date and time is recorded, and the game is played. Although the power failure of the machine itself does not occur, log information of the power failure date may be recorded. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-42, the date and time when the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is stopped are temporarily stored as a temporary power cut date and time, and an initialization designation command, a restoration command, etc. The log information of the power cut date is officially recorded on condition that the power-on command is received so that such a situation does not occur.

In this example, the condition that the initialization command or the command at the time of recovery is received is judged as the power failure of the gaming machine itself and the power failure date and time is recorded in the log information. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the power cut date and time may be recorded in the log information based on the reception of other commands such as a setting confirmation command and a setting change command transmitted at the time of power-on. Further, in the process of step 099IWS001 of the effect control main process, it may be determined that the power of the gaming machine itself has been interrupted based on the power-off signal being input from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127.

Next, a specific example of the display screen in the maintenance mode will be described. 8-45 to 8-48 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the display screen in the maintenance mode. In addition, in FIG. 8-45 to FIG. 8-48, a display screen changes in order of (A) (B) (C)...

First, a specific example of a display screen when a maintenance history selection operation is performed in the maintenance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-45 and 8-46. When the setting confirmation command is received when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, a character display such as "setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in Fig. 8-45(A). The setting confirmation display is started (see steps 012IWS453 to S455). Further, as shown in FIG. 8-45(A), when the setting confirmation display is being displayed, a character display such as "Press the push button to switch to the maintenance mode" is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, a display prompting an operation for shifting to the maintenance mode is displayed.

Next, when the player presses the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 8-45(B), the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed on the image display device 5, and the maintenance mode is entered (see steps 012IWS456 to S458). As shown in FIG. 8-45(B), the maintenance mode menu screen displays options for “maintenance history”, “setting change/confirmation history”, and “current time setting”, and the current time is displayed. It is displayed.

When the option 012IW106 of "maintenance history" is selected, the display is switched to the maintenance history screen on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-45(C), on the maintenance history screen, the date and time and the log content are displayed in association with each other, and the latest log information is displayed in order so as to be ranked higher. In the example shown in FIG. 8-45(C), an illegal prize error indicating that an illegal prize has been detected at a prize hole such as the first prize hole or the second prize hole, the first count switch 012IW023a and the second count Log information of a switch abnormality error indicating that an abnormality of various switches such as the switch 012IW023b, a prize ball error indicating that a prize ball abnormality is detected, and a magnet error indicating that an abnormal magnetism is detected is displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-45(C), log information indicating that the probability variation failure is detected is also displayed (see steps 012IWS958 to S960).

Further, when the maintenance history screen has a plurality of pages, when the next page is selected, the screen shifts to the second page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 8-45(D), log information of setting change start and setting change end (see steps 012 IWS802 and S811) and log information of power cut date and power-on date and time are displayed (step 012IWS203, S847). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-45(D), log information for left-handed notification and full tank notification is also displayed (see steps 012IWS117 and S145).

If there is a further next page, selecting the next page causes the screen to move to the third page of the maintenance history screen, as shown in FIG. When the selection operation is performed, the screen shifts to the fourth page of the maintenance history screen as shown in Fig. 8-46(F). In the example shown in FIG. 8-46(E), log information indicating the start of setting confirmation and the end of setting confirmation is displayed (see steps 012IWS805 and S815), and the current time is set during the maintenance mode during setting confirmation. The log information to that effect is also displayed (see step 012IWS835).

In the present example, when the current time is set, the date and time information after the setting is read and the log information is recorded, so that the date and time may be inconsistent before and after the current time is set. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 8-46(E), the setting confirmation is started at 09:36:28 on 2018/03/21 (Wednesday), while the setting time is set. It is supposed to be 09:36:16 on 2018/03/21 (Wednesday), and the time is earlier than the start of setting confirmation. In this way, in this example, even if the date and time do not match before and after the current time setting, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information occurred, as shown in FIG. The log information is displayed in the order in which the log information occurred.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-46(F), log information of an RWM abnormal error (see steps 012IWS017 to S020) indicating that some kind of RAM abnormality has occurred when the power to the gaming machine is turned on is displayed. Then, since the RWM abnormal error has occurred, the gaming shop staff temporarily turns off the power supply to the gaming machine and then turns on the power again while turning on the clear switch, as shown in FIG. 8-46(E). Log information indicating that the encryption processing has been executed is also displayed (see step IWS809).

Next, a specific example of the display screen when the setting change/confirmation history selection operation is performed in the maintenance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. While the setting confirmation display shown in FIG. 8-47(A) is being displayed, the player presses the push button 31B to display the maintenance mode menu screen shown in FIG. 8-47(B). It is assumed that the option 012IW107 of "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and operated during display.

When the option 012IW107 of “setting change/confirmation history” is selected, the display is switched to the setting change/confirmation history screen on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-47(C), on the setting change/confirmation history screen, the date and time, the setting change or the setting confirmation, and the changed setting value or the confirmed setting value are displayed in association with each other. Then, the latest log information is displayed in order so that it is ranked higher.

Next, a specific example of the display screen when the selection operation of the current time setting is performed in the maintenance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. While the setting confirmation display shown in FIG. 8-48(A) is being displayed, the player presses the push button 31B to display the maintenance mode menu screen shown in FIG. 8-48(B). It is assumed that the “current time setting” option 012IW108 is selected and operated during display.

When the “current time setting” option 012IW108 is selected, the image display device 5 switches to display the current time setting screen as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 8-48(C) and 8-48(D), the year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, or second item is selected by tilting the stick controller 31A to the left or right, and the stick A number for each item is selected by tilting the controller 31A forward and backward. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 8-48(C), when it is desired to change the hour from 16 to 15, the stick controller 31A is tilted four times to the right to move to the hour item, and the stick controller 31A is moved. The tilt operation may be performed once in the front direction (front direction with respect to the player) to change from “16” to “15”. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-48(D), when the player presses the push button 31B, the current date and time is set to the currently displayed date and time.

In the feature part 099IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion during big hit. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed prior to the big hit suggestive effect (or the pre-game suggestive effect or the in-game suggestive effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of an error. Further, in the case where a predetermined effect that can be executed at the same time as the big hit suggestive effect (for example, a specific effect mode of the fanfare effect) is provided, and the predetermined effect makes it difficult to recognize the big hit medium suggestive effect In addition, the suggestion effect during the big hit may be prioritized. Specifically, in the case where the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect makes it difficult to recognize the image displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect, the image is displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect. You may make it display an image preferentially. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit.

Further, in the feature part 099IW, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the decorative pattern is variably displayed by driving the drum-shaped movable body having the decorative pattern on the surface. (In other words, it may be applied to a so-called drum type game machine). Alternatively, the decorative pattern may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having a decorative pattern on its surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel type gaming machine, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation different from the normal operation at the start of the first fluctuation after the setting change (or the characteristic). Behavior may occur). Therefore, in the first fluctuation after the setting is changed, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the execution ratio may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

In addition, in the feature part 099IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are configured to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect by executing the accessory effect or the light guide plate effect. Also in this case, the visibility may be lowered at a high rate when the player gives an undesired suggestion. For example, when an even-numbered initial result is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestive effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility is reduced. As described above, the ratio of executing the accessory effect in which the movable member operates or the light guide plate effect in which characters or pictures are displayed by the light guide plate may be increased. Further, not only the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect, but also effects including a control for outputting a predetermined sound, a control for vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and a control for causing a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED to emit light in a predetermined mode. By performing the above, the player's attention may be directed to another person, and the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced (or made less noticeable).

Moreover, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the characteristic part 099IW, the simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result set by the measurement timer or the real-time clock 012IW126 set at power-on) is executed in a specific mode. Therefore, the setting may be suggested.

In addition, a setting suggesting effect that suggests a setting according to the number of times the variable display is continuously executed without the holding memory being 0, or the number of starting winnings exceeding the upper limit holding memory number (for example, a predetermined image). Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be performed.

In addition, during a predetermined operation valid period, setting suggestive effect suggesting the setting based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B (for example, display control of a predetermined image or output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined control). (Emission control of the lamp is performed) may be performed.

The characteristic part 099IW has been described above with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions without departing from the scope of the invention. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, the characteristic part 099IW exemplifies a form in which the security cover 012IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 012IW001a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 012IW003 side. Good. Specifically, as a modified example 1, as shown in FIGS. 8-49(A) and 8-49(B), a security cover 012IW500B including a short piece 012IW500Ba and a long piece 012IW500Bb is provided, for example, with respect to the substrate case 012IW201. The right end of the long piece 012IW500Bb is provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction between a covering position for covering the right side of the substrate case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 and a covering releasing position on the right side of the covering position.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 012IW201, and is set through the through hole 012IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 012IW500Bb. The key 012IW051 may be operable. In other words, in the first modification, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the security cover 012IW500B (long piece 012IW500Bb) covers the setting key 012IW051 and slides in the left-right direction with respect to the board case 012IW201. By being regulated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 012IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 012IW051 is covered, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is released. The restricted state can be released (can be changed to the allowed state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-49(A) and 8-49(B), when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the projecting dimension of the security cover 012IW500B from the substrate case 012IW201 is the length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, by sliding the security cover 012IW500B with respect to the board case 012IW201, the protruding dimension of the security cover 012IW500B from the board case 012IW201 is extended to the length L2. (L2>L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 8-50(A), when the game machine frame 012IW003 is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 012IW500B has a protruding dimension from the substrate case 012IW201. By sliding the board case 012IW201 until it reaches the length L2 (making the pachinko gaming machine 1 in an allowable state), a clerk or the like in the game arcade operates the setting key 012IW051 to set the value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 8-50(B), the security cover 012IW500B is mounted on the board case 012IW201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 012IW201 becomes the length L1. Unless it is slidably moved (without changing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the restricted state), the security cover 012IW500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 012IW001a, and it becomes impossible to close the gaming machine frame 012IW003. Has become.

For this reason, in this modification 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowed state, so that the setting key 012IW051 is covered by the security cover 012IW500B. It is possible to prevent forgetting to do so, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 012IW003 without restricting the operation on the operation unit, and it is possible to improve security.

In the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 012IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 012IW001a and the gaming machine frame 012IW003, so that the movement from the covered position to the left and right is restricted. However, the security cover 012IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction within a range in which the setting key 012IW051 is kept covered by the security cover 012IW500B.

(Modification 2)
Further, as a mode in which a security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 012IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. 8-51A and 8-51B as a second modification, the left end portion of the security cover 012IW500C is a gaming machine. Between a covering position for covering the right side portion of the substrate case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 and a covering releasing position rotated from the covering position, centering on a vertical axis 012IW500Cd provided on the back side of the frame 012IW003. It may be pivotally supported by. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 012IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 012IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 012IW001a, and the long piece 012IW500Cb pushes the setting key 012IW051 to the rear side. The rotation from the state of being covered to the back side may be restricted.

Then, when the game machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500C is rotated around the axis 012IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the substrate case 012IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 012IW051 is covered. It can be operated. That is, in the second modification, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the security cover 012IW500C (long piece 012IW500Cb) is regulated to rotate while the setting key 012IW051 is covered, so that the pachinko gaming machine is prevented. 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500C is rotated with respect to the substrate case 012IW201 about the pivot 012IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) to release the state in which the setting key 012IW051 is covered. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released (can be changed to an allowable state) from the restricted state.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-52(A), the security cover 012IW500C according to the present second modification rotates around the pivot 012IW500Cd (puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in an allowed state), thereby The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by operating the setting key 012IW051 by a store clerk or the like. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 8-52(B), the security cover 012IW500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and the security cover 012IW500C sets a key. If the 012IW051 is not covered (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the regulated state), the security cover 012IW500C contacts the front end of the outer frame 012IW001a, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 012IW003. Is becoming

For this reason, in the second modification, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowed state, so that the setting key 012IW051 is covered by the security cover 012IW500C. It is possible to prevent forgetting to do so, that is, to close the game machine frame 012IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and it is possible to improve security.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the characteristic part 099IW, an example in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a glass door frame. The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable by opening 012IW003a. In addition, when it is possible to change the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by opening the glass door frame 012IW003a in this way, a modification 3 is shown in FIG. 8-53(A) to FIG. 8-53(C). As described above, the through hole 012IW003b may be formed in the lower portion of the gaming machine frame 012IW003, and the setting key 012IW051 can be operated through the through hole 012IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 012IW051 is arranged on the surface of the main board 11 opposite to the mounting surface. ..

When the setting key 012IW051 can be operated via the through hole 012IW003b as described above, a door body 012IW003c capable of opening and closing the through hole 012IW003b is provided, and the setting key 012IW051 is closed when the door body 012IW003c is closed. The operation may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 8-53(B) and 8-53(C), when the door body 012IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 012IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 012IW003a. Since 012IW003c will be sandwiched between the glass door frame 012IW003a and the gaming machine frame 012IW003 so that it can be opened and closed, it is possible to strongly prevent the setting key 012IW051 from being illegally operated when the glass door frame 012IW003a is closed. Therefore, it is possible to improve security.

(Modification 4)
Further, the information that can be recorded as the log information is not limited to that shown by the characteristic part 099IW, and various log information can be recorded. FIG. 8-54 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the maintenance history screen in Modification 4. The modification 4 shows a case in which information indicating setting suggestion failure or “pointing failure” is recorded as log information and is configured to be displayed on the maintenance history screen. The log information 012IW109a of "unsuccessful setting suggestion" is the reason why the player does not operate or the operation means fails, even though the execution condition of the set value suggesting effect suggesting the current set value is satisfied. Thus, the log information indicates that the set value suggestion effect has not been executed or the set value suggestion effect with low suggestion accuracy has been executed. In addition, the log information 012IW109b indicating “unsuccessful point addition” means that the player does not operate even though the condition for giving points necessary for customizing the display screen of the image display device 5 and acquiring image content is satisfied. It is log information indicating that points have not been given due to reasons such as failure of the operating means. As described above, it may be configured such that the profit related to the performance or the profit related to the content can be given in some form and the log information thereof is recorded.

(Modification 5)
Further, the information that can be recorded as the log information is not limited to that shown by the characteristic part 099IW, and various log information can be recorded. FIG. 8-55 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the maintenance history screen in Modification 5. The fifth modification shows a case where the log information 099IW109 indicating that the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has occurred can be displayed on the maintenance history screen. In the configuration of the characteristic part 099IW, the log information indicating that the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b and the like is stored only in the second log area, and thus is not displayed as the history information on the maintenance history screen. A configuration in which this log information is stored in both the first log area and the second log area, and in addition to the log information recorded in the first log area, the log information recorded in the second log area A part (for example, log information including the system reset date and time) can be realized by being configured to be displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode.

Further, for example, in a gaming machine provided with a distribution device for alternately allocating game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 5 pieces) is continuously provided to one of the starting winning openings. It is also possible to detect the winning opening unit abnormality error based on the detection of the winning prize), record it in the log information, and display it on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, a vibration error indicating that an abnormal vibration in a gaming machine is detected or a radio wave error indicating that an abnormal radio wave is detected may be recorded as log information and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Of course, various modes of log information can be considered.

As described above, according to the present characteristic unit 099IW, the power supply unit (for example, the power supply substrate) and the first control unit (for example, mounted on the main substrate 11) that receives power from the power supply unit and performs control. A second control means (for example, a second effect control board 012IW12b) that receives power from the game control microcomputer 100) and receives power from the power supply means and performs control based on instruction information from the first control means. The production control CPU 012IW120b) and the monitoring means for monitoring the power supply supplied to the second control means and notifying the second control means (for example, the power supply supplied to the second production control board 012IW12b is monitored and the power supply voltage is And a power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 which outputs a power-off signal to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b when the voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, +8V), and the second control means, when starting control, the monitoring means. Executes a different start-up process according to the notification from (for example, when the power cutoff signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, the start of control is waited until the input of the power cutoff signal is stopped. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b is a part that executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS002. On the other hand, if the power-off signal is not input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of the control, wait for the start of the control. Instead, the log information including the acquired date/time information as the system reset date/time of the second effect control board 012IW12b is stored in the log area (the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS003). With such a configuration, optimum processing can be executed according to the situation.

In addition, according to the characteristic part 099IW, power supply means (for example, a power supply board) and first control means for receiving power supply from the power supply means and performing first control (for example, for game control mounted on the main board 11) A microcomputer 100), a second control means (for example, a second effect control CPU 012IW120b mounted on a second effect control board 012IW12b) that receives a power supply from a power supply means and performs a second control, and a second control means. Monitoring means for monitoring the supplied power and notifying the second control means (for example, monitoring the power supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b, when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, +8V) , A power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 which outputs a power-off signal to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, and the first control means is capable of specifying that power is supplied and the first control is started. For example, a power-on command such as a setting change command, a setting confirmation command, an initialization designation command, etc.) is notified to the second control means, and the second control means has a predetermined power supply voltage of the supplied power at the start of control. When the monitoring means notifies that the value has changed from less than the value to more than the predetermined value, at least the first control means and the second control means are specified to be restarted, and based on the instruction information from the first control means. The second control is started (for example, when the power cutoff signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, after waiting for the start of the control until the input of the power cutoff signal is stopped, a setting change command or , A setting confirmation command, an initialization designation command, and the like, based on a command when the power is turned on. ), at the start of control, when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power is equal to or higher than the predetermined value, it is specified that only the second control means has restarted, and the second control is started ( For example, when the power-off signal is not input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, the log information including the acquired date/time information as the system reset date/time of the second effect control board 012IW12b without waiting for the start of control. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS003. Part that executes the process). With such a configuration, optimum processing can be executed according to the situation.

In addition, according to the characteristic part 099IW, a power supply unit (for example, a power supply substrate) and a first control unit (for example, a game control microcomputer mounted on the main substrate 11) that receives power from the power supply unit and performs control. 100) and second control means for receiving power from the power supply means and performing control based on the instruction information from the first control means (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b). And monitoring means for monitoring the power supplied to the second control means and notifying the second control means (for example, the power supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b is monitored, and the power supply voltage has a predetermined value (for example, The power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127) that outputs a power-off signal to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b when the voltage is less than +8V), and the second control means responds to the notification from the monitoring means at the start of control. It has an output means for outputting information capable of specifying the activation history of the second control means (for example, when it is determined that a system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has occurred, and when the game machine itself is cut off. The start history can be recognized by displaying different initial images at different times, and the log information 099IW109 indicating that the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has occurred is displayed on the maintenance history screen. For the log information recorded in the second log area, the inspection device is connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the inspection device and the second effect control of the second effect control board 012IW12b are possible. It is read by inputting/outputting the inspection signal to/from the dedicated CPU 012IW120b). With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the situation when the power is turned on, and it is possible to execute the optimum processing according to the situation.

The "first control means" and the "second control means" are the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b. This feature section is not limited to the combination with, but also for the combination of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b and the first effect control CPU 012IW120a installed on the first effect control board 012IW12a. The 099IW configuration can be applied. In this case, the power supplied to the first effect control board 012IW12a is monitored, and a power-off signal is output to the first effect control board 012IW12a when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, +8V). A power supply monitoring circuit may be provided. With such a configuration, the process can be started after the power is stably supplied to the first effect control board 012IW12a, and the occurrence of a system reset or the like can be specified in the first effect control board 012IW12a when the power is turned on. , It is possible to execute the optimum processing according to the situation.

In this characteristic part 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-2, instead of the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, a first effect control board 012IW12a and a second effect control board 012IW12b are mounted. The configuration of the characteristic part 099IW can be applied to a gaming machine on which the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. In this case, a power supply monitoring circuit that monitors the power supplied to the effect control board 12 and outputs a power-off signal to the effect control board 12 when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, +8V). It should be provided. With such a configuration, the process can be started after the power is stably supplied to the first effect control board 12, and the occurrence of a system reset or the like can be specified in the effect control board 12 when the power is turned on. Optimal processing can be performed according to

Further, according to this characteristic unit 099IW, the second control unit continues until the monitoring unit notifies that the power supply voltage of the power supply to be supplied is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, +8V) (for example, the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127. Until the input of the power-off signal is stopped), the control is not started (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS002). With such a configuration, optimum processing can be executed according to the situation.

In addition, according to this characteristic unit 099IW, a storage unit (for example, backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory substrate 099IW14) capable of holding the stored contents even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped is provided, and the second control unit is provided. When the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the power supply to be supplied has changed from less than a predetermined value to more than the predetermined value at the start of control (for example, a power-off signal from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control). When the input signal is input and the input of the power-off signal is stopped after that, predetermined information (eg, power-on date/time, setting change start date/time, setting confirmation start date/time) based on the instruction information from the first control means , RAM clear date and time) in the storage means (for example, the part for executing the processing of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, step 099IWS205, step 012IWS802, step 012IWS805, step 012IWS809, etc.), and is supplied at the start of control. When the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the power supply is not less than the predetermined value, the predetermined image is displayed on the display means and the predetermined information is not stored in the storage means (for example, the system of the second effect control board 012IW12b). When a reset or the like occurs, the initial image is displayed on the image display device 5, but the processing of step 099IWS204 is not executed, and the power-on command such as the setting change command, the setting confirmation command, and the initialization designation command is displayed. It doesn't receive it, so it doesn't store log information about them). With such a configuration, optimum processing can be executed according to the situation.

Further, according to this feature unit 099IW, the storage unit includes a first storage unit (for example, a first log area for recording log information for a game shop) and a second storage unit (for example, log information for a game machine maker). And a second log area for recording), the second control means, at the start of control, when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the power supply to be supplied has changed from less than a predetermined value to more than the predetermined value. Stores predetermined information related to the activation in the first storage means based on the instruction information from the first control means (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b causes step 099IWS204, step 012IWS802, step 012IWS805, step 012IWS809, etc. When the control means notifies that the power supply voltage of the power supply to be supplied is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, it is possible to specify that only the second control means has restarted. Information (for example, log information including the system reset date and time) is stored in the second storage unit (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes N of step 099IWS001, processing of step 099IWS003). With such a configuration, optimum processing can be executed according to the situation.

Further, according to this feature unit 099IW, the second control unit controls the first backup process (for example, the backup process of storing the log information in the first log area) for storing the control-related information in the first storage unit, and the control. It is possible to execute a second backup process (for example, a backup process in which log information is stored in the second log area) that stores information regarding the information in the second storage unit, and the first backup process stores one piece of information in one storage. The second backup process stores one piece of information in a plurality of storage areas (see, for example, FIG. 8-19). With such a configuration, optimum processing can be executed according to the situation.

Further, according to the characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player. In addition, a storage area (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing information generated during a game is provided, abnormal history information (for example, log information) regarding a game can be specified and displayed, and storage contents of the storage area can be displayed. Initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1) for initialization can be executed, and when the initialization processing is executed, setting change processing (for example, setting change processing) for changing the set value is executed. It is possible. Further, when the initialization process is executed and the setting change process is not executed, it is possible to display that the initialization process has been executed in a identifiable manner (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-46(E)). , The RAM clear log information is displayed), and when the initialization process and the setting change process are executed, the setting change process is executed without the display capable of specifying that the initialization process has been executed. It is possible to display the information so that it can be specified (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-45 (D), only log information indicating the end of the setting change is displayed). Therefore, since unnecessary information is not displayed, it is possible to prevent the history information from being difficult to confirm. That is, in this example, when the setting change process is executed, it is premised that the initialization process is executed, but when the log information of the setting change is displayed, the initialization process is executed. Since it is also obvious that it is redundant to record and display the log information of the initialization process. Therefore, by not recording and displaying unnecessary log information of the initialization process, it is possible to prevent unnecessary log information from being recorded, and to prevent the history information from being difficult to confirm.

In addition, according to the feature part 099IW, it is possible to execute the setting confirmation process (for example, the setting confirmation process) for confirming the set value, and the action of the player is detected during the execution of the setting confirmation process. Based on the fact that the push button 31B is pressed during the display of the setting confirmation display, as shown in FIGS. Maintenance mode menu screen is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to preferably confirm the history information.

In addition, according to this feature section 099IW, the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that controls the game, and the effect control based on the information from the game control means. And a production control means (for example, a second production control CPU 012IW120b). Further, the game control means can output initialization information (for example, an initialization designation command) indicating that the initialization processing has been executed, and set change information (for example, the setting change information indicating that the setting change processing is executed). , Setting change command) can be output. Further, the effect control means can display different history information so that different history information can be specified according to whether or not the initialization information and the setting change information are output (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b uses the initialization designation command). And based on the fact that the setting change command is received, the log information of the setting change end is recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 8-45(D). Therefore, it is possible to preferably confirm the history information.

In addition, according to the characteristic unit 099IW, a predetermined abnormality (for example, a left-handed notification state) can be detected, and history storage means capable of storing history information (for example, backup data memories 099IW 210A to 210D of the backup memory substrate 099IW14). And a log area of the RAM012IW122b). In addition, a first abnormal state indicating that the predetermined abnormality has a predetermined importance (for example, a first left-handed notification state), and a first abnormality state indicating that the predetermined abnormality has a higher importance than the first abnormal state. Information indicating that the second abnormal state is detected without being able to detect information indicating that the second abnormal state is detected (for example, the second left-handing notification state) and the information indicating that the first abnormal state has been detected is not stored as history information. Can be stored as history information (for example, log information is recorded only when the second left-handed notification state occurs). Therefore, the history information can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the feature part 099IW, the first abnormality (for example, the first left-handing notification state) and the second abnormality having a higher degree of importance than the first abnormality (for example, the second left-handing notification state) are provided. It can be detected. Further, the history storage means is provided with a history storage means (for example, a log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 and a log area of the RAM012IW122b) capable of storing history information of an abnormality relating to the game. It is possible to display the history information to be specified (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-45 and 8-46, a maintenance history screen is displayed). Further, when the second abnormality is detected, information indicating that the second abnormality is detected is stored as history information, while the first abnormality is detected when the first abnormality is detected by the abnormality detecting means. The information indicating that it has been performed is not stored as history information (for example, log information is recorded only when the second left-handing notification state occurs, and log information is not recorded even when the first left-handing notification state occurs). Therefore, the history information can be preferably stored and displayed. That is, since the storage capacity of the log information is also limited, if the log is recorded as the first anomaly log information of low importance, the history of necessary anomalies may be erased early. Then, since only the second and higher levels of importance are recorded, it is possible to suitably store and display the history information.

Further, according to the characteristic part 099IW, the second abnormality is detected according to the detection result of the first abnormality per unit period (for example, based on the execution conditions of the two first left-handing notifications being satisfied). The condition for executing the second left-handed notification is satisfied). Therefore, the history information can be preferably stored and displayed.

Although the present example shows a case where the execution condition for the second left-handing notification is satisfied according to the number of times the execution condition for the first left-handing notification is satisfied, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it is configured to execute the second left-handed notification by determining that the execution condition of the second left-handed notification has been satisfied based on that the execution condition of the first left-handed notification continues for a predetermined period. Good.

Further, according to the characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to inform that the first abnormality is detected and the second abnormality is detected (for example, the first left-handing notification and the second left-handing notification are executed. ). In this case, it is possible to notify that the first abnormality has been detected in a predetermined mode and to notify that the second abnormality has been detected in a mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, in the first left-handed notification). Only the left-handing notification display is performed, and in the second left-handing notification, in addition to the left-handing notification display, all the game effect lamps 9 and the sound output of the notification sound are performed). Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify the abnormality.

In addition, according to the feature part 099IW, it is possible to detect a plurality of types of first abnormality and second abnormality (for example, in addition to the first left-handing notification state and the second left-handing notification state, a first full tank notification). State and the second full tank notification state are detected). Further, the first abnormality and the second abnormality are detected under different detection conditions for each type of the first abnormality and the second abnormality (for example, the first left-handing notification state and the second left-handing notification state are transferred to the passage gate 012IW041). While the determination is made by detecting the passage of the game ball 5 times or 10 times, the first full tank notification state and the second full tank notification state are 10 when the hit ball supply tray (lower tray) is full tank. Seconds or 30 seconds). Therefore, the history information can be preferably stored and displayed.

In this example, a case where the full tank notification is executed other than the left-handed notification is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is configured to execute an abnormal winning notification, a magnet error notification, a ball clogging error notification, and the like. For these, there are a first notification with low importance and a second notification with high importance, and the second notification is given. The log information may be recorded only when it is executed and displayed on the maintenance history screen.

Further, according to the characteristic part 099IW, a predetermined control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and a specific control means (for example, a control means for performing control based on information from the predetermined control means). The specific control means can temporarily store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control means is stopped (for example, the date and time information is stored in a temporary area of the RAM012IW122b every 100 ms). When the power supply to the specific control means is started, information (for example, an initialization designation command, a command at the time of restoration) that is output by the predetermined control means and can identify the start of the power supply is provided. Based on the input, it is possible to store the temporarily stored date and time as the power cut date and time (for example, log information is stored in the log area as the power cut date and time). That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which both the power cut of the gaming machine itself and the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b are recorded as the power cut date, and the power cut date is set. It can be stored appropriately.

Further, according to this feature unit 099IW, when the information that can specify that the power supply is started cannot be input when the power supply to the specific control unit is started, the temporarily stored date and time is set as the power cut date and time. Not stored (for example, if the initialization designation command or the restoration command is not received, the log information is not stored in the log area as the power cut date and time). Therefore, the power cut date and time can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the characteristic part 099IW, the date and time can be temporarily stored at every predetermined timing (for example, 100 ms) (for example, the date and time information is stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW122b). Therefore, the power cut date and time can be preferably stored.

In this example, the case where the date and time information is temporarily stored every 100 ms is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, only when the stop of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is detected, the current date and time information may be temporarily stored and stored as a temporary power cut date and time.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 099IW, the temporary storage of the date and time at every predetermined timing is stopped based on the stop of the power supply to the specific control means (for example, the temporary storage enable flag is reset, and the date and time at every 100 ms). Temporary storage of information will not be executed). Then, the temporary storage of the date and time at each predetermined timing is restarted based on the input of the predetermined information (for example, the initialization designation command, the command at the time of restoration, another command) output by the predetermined control means (for example, , The temporary storage enabled flag is set, and the temporary storage of date and time information every 100 ms is restarted). Therefore, the power cut date and time can be preferably stored.

Further, according to this characteristic unit 099IW, the specific control unit can store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control unit is started (for example, the power-on date and time is recorded as log information). In addition, if the date and time when the power supply is started is not stored, the temporarily stored date and time is not stored as the power cut date (for example, when the log information of the power on date before the power cut is not recorded. Does not record the log information of the power cut date). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an abnormal storage state. That is, since there is no record that the power of the gaming machine has been turned on, it is possible to prevent an abnormal state in which the power cut date and time are recorded.

Further, according to the feature part 099IW, the first control means (for example, the CPU 012IW120a for the first effect control) and the second control means (for example, the second effect control for controlling based on the information from the first control means). CPU 012IW120b). The first control means sequentially outputs a plurality of pieces of information regarding the change of the date and time to the second control means over a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., 10 ms has elapsed) (e.g., hour signal, minute signal). , Second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, and day of the week signal). In addition, the second control unit stores the date and time change history after a specific period of time that is equal to or longer than a predetermined period after inputting a part of the plurality of pieces of information regarding the date and time change (for example, FIG. As indicated by 40, after waiting for 500 ms after receiving the hour signal, it is recorded in the log information as the time setting date and time). Therefore, the date and time change history can be preferably stored.

Further, according to this feature unit 099IW, the second control unit changes the internal date and time information each time the information regarding the change of the date and time is input (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-40, received). Immediately set the information of the real time clock 012IW126 based on the hour signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, or day signal). Therefore, the date and time change history can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, when the information regarding the change of the date and time is input a plurality of times before the specific period has elapsed, the second control unit determines the date and time based on the information regarding the change of the date and time that was input last. The change history is stored (for example, when an hour signal, a minute signal, a second signal, an year signal, a month signal, a day signal, and a day signal are further received before the elapse of 500 ms, based on the last received signal. Log information of the time setting date and time is recorded based on the date and time information of the set real time clock 012IW126). Therefore, the date and time change history can be preferably stored.

Further, according to this feature part 099IW, the second control means can display the date and time change history (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-46 (E), the current time is set on the maintenance history screen). Display the log information to the effect that it was broken). Further, according to the date and time after the change, the date and time change history is stored and displayed (for example, the date and time information is read from the set real time clock 012IW126 and the log information is recorded as the time set date and time). Therefore, the date and time change history can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the characteristic part 099IW, the second control means stores the history information according to the order in which the abnormality relating to the game occurs regardless of the change of the date and time (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-46(E)). , Even if the date and time do not match before and after the current time setting, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information occurs, and the log information is displayed in the order in which the log information occurs). Therefore, it is possible to preferably store the history information of the abnormality.

Further, according to the characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to give a profit to the player based on that the specific condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball is won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). (For example, it is controlled to a probability change state after the big hit game is over). Further, the specific condition can be established based on at least a predetermined condition being established (for example, being a probability variation big hit). Then, when the specific condition is not satisfied although the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store the specific information (for example, the log information of the probability change failure date/time) that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied. .. Therefore, the information can be preferably stored. That is, troubles other than errors can be recorded, and information can be stored appropriately.

Further, according to the characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to give a profit related to the performance or a profit related to the content (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-54, log information 012IW109a of “setting suggestion unsuccessful” or “point addition unsuccessful”. Of the log information 012IW109b). Therefore, the information can be preferably stored.

In this example, with respect to profit, when the V winning is not established and the probability change is not established, the setting suggestion is unsuccessful, or the point is unsuccessful, log information is recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, in a gaming machine configured to perform a bonus game in which a game ball shifts to a jackpot game based on the fact that a game ball has won in a specific area (V winning area) in the winning object, the gaming ball is winning in the V winning area. If not, the log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. In addition, for example, when the setting value suggestion effect is executed, but a low setting value is suggested, log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, it may be configured to record the log information and display the log information on the maintenance history screen when it is not displayed or output in a scene in which an image having a low appearance frequency or a sound output is expected. In addition, for example, when applied to a slot machine, log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen when the pressing order is wrong while the pressing order navigation is being executed. As such, various modes can be considered as the “profit”.

In addition, according to the characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to display the specific information in a recognizable manner (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-45(C), the maintenance history screen may display the ingredient information for which the probability change is unsuccessful). As shown in FIG. 8-54, the log information 012IW109a of “setting suggestion unsuccessful” or the log information 012IW109b of “point unsuccessful” is displayed on the maintenance history screen). Therefore, the information can be preferably displayed.

In this example, the case where the probability change failure date/time, the setting suggestion failure, and the point information failure log information are displayed on the maintenance history screen may be displayed, but may not be displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, the log information may be stored in the second log area for recording the log information for the gaming machine maker, instead of the first log area for recording the log information for the gaming machine. Then, the game machine maker may check what kind of trouble has occurred, and may utilize it for developing the game machine.

Further, according to the characteristic part 099IW, information including the specific information can be output as a two-dimensional code (for example, a two-dimensional code including log information of the probability change failure date and time is generated and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to preferably output the information.

In this example, the case where the log information is recorded in association with the date and time information including both the date and the time has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the log information may be recorded in association with date information including only year, month and day, or the log information may be recorded in association with time information including only hour, minute and second. Good. Various modes are conceivable as a method of recording the log information. Similarly, in the feature part 099IW, the “date and time” is not limited to the case where both date information and time information are included, but includes the case where only date information is included, and includes only time information. It is a concept that includes cases.

In addition, the characteristic part 099IW includes the following second invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. .. Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 describes that the setting change process is executed when the power switch is operated to the ON side while the front frame is opened and the setting key switch is operated to the ON side. .. It is also described that the RAM area other than the setting value storage means is cleared in the setting change processing. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine capable of being set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Operation means (for example, clear switch) provided so as to be able to execute initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing, RAM clear 2 processing) based on the operation when power supply to the gaming machine is started. When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM012IW122b) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operating means has been operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started,
When performing a plurality of processes including a set value changing process for changing the set value, a process executing means that executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times (for example, step 012IWS025 in the game control microcomputer 100). S034 and S048 are executed) and a gaming machine is described. According to this feature, any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for a player is set. Processing can be suitably performed in the game machine configured to be settable. In particular, in a process that requires a certain amount of processing time such as changing a set value, specific information (in this example, a RAM clear flag) is stored, and the RAM clear flag is checked to execute the process, which is preferable. It can be performed.

In this example, as a process to be executed “using specific information multiple times”, a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is transmitted in steps 012IWS026 and S207 depending on whether the RAM clear flag is set in step 012IWS025. Control, whether to execute the process of changing the set value of steps 012IWS035 to S042 depending on whether the RAM clear flag is set in step 012IWS034, or to clear the RAM in step 012IWS048. The case where the restoration process or the RAM clear 1 process of steps 012IWS049 and S051 is executed depending on whether the flag is set is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, whether or not the operation switch is enabled may be controlled immediately before the operation of changing the set value depending on whether or not the specific information (RAM clear flag) is set.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The process execution means changes the set value based on the operation of the operation means in the set value change processing (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 012IWS039 to S042).
According to such a configuration, the operating means can also be used, so that an increase in cost can be suppressed. That is, in this example, since the clear switch can be used as both the operation means for performing the operation for initializing the RAM 102 and the operation means for changing the set value, the cost increase can be suppressed. it can.

In this example, since the clear switch is also used, it is necessary to check the state of the clear switch multiple times when turning on the power to the gaming machine, so the clear switch should be turned on first when turning on the power to the gaming machine. When it is detected, the RAM clear flag is set, and thereafter, whether or not the RAM clear flag is set is checked to see if the operation of the clear switch for initializing the RAM 102 is performed. As for the operation of the clear switch for the change operation, the state of the clear switch itself is confirmed so that the processing can be appropriately performed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the second invention,
The normal initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing) is executed based on the operation means being operated when the power supply to the game machine is started, while the power supply to the game machine is started. Sometimes, an initialization process executing unit performs an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 2 process) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of an abnormality (for example, a part for executing steps 012IWS015 and S051 in the game control microcomputer 100). )When,
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process;
A second storage area (for example, a clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the initialization processing at the time of abnormality,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the second invention,
On the basis of the state of the operating means being switched from the off state to the on state, it is possible to determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, a portion for executing step 012IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The processing execution means can change the set value based on the judgment that the operation means has been operated by the judgment means in the set value change processing (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, at step 012IWS041). If Y, execute step 012IWS042),
The determining means determines whether or not the operating means has been operated by setting the state of the operating means for the first time when the power supply to the gaming machine is started to be on (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100). Executes Step 012IWS037 if N in Step 012IWS036)
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the second invention,
It is provided with a timer interrupt processing execution means (for example, a portion executing steps S21 to S27 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a timer interrupt processing each time a predetermined timer interrupt occurs.
The processing execution means executes the processing by using the specific information a plurality of times until the timer interrupt processing is executed after the power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is (Execute Step 012IWS025, S034, S048)
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 012IWS047 and S178) Prepare,
Suggestion production execution means,
Based on the setting value information input from the information output unit, it is possible to execute suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) (for example, second effect control CPU 012IW120b). Step 012 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode or a suggestive effect during game, a big hit mid-time suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to perform pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect (for example, the CPU 012IW120b for the second effect control). Executes steps 012IWS514, S709, and S906 so as not to perform the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, and the big hit mid-point suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

In addition, the feature part 099IW includes the following third invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2017-60546. .. Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-60546 describes that if the RAM clear switch is operated and the setting key switch is in the ON state, the initial setting 2 is executed and the lottery probability is changed. Further, it is described that the setting key switch is used to enable the setting switch, and the winning lottery probability of the special figure corresponding to the settings 1 to 3 indicated by the setting switch is set. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-60546, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine capable of being set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Operating means (for example, a clear switch),
Process execution means capable of executing a set value changing process for changing the set value based on the operation means being operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, a game control microcomputer Portion for executing steps 012IWS039 to S042 in 100),
Based on that the state of the operating means is switched from the off state to the on state, it is possible to determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 012IWS041). Prepare,
The processing execution means can change the set value based on the judgment that the operation means has been operated by the judgment means in the setting value change processing (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the step When Y is 012IWS041, Step 012IWS042 is executed),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means is operated by setting the first state of the operation means when the setting value change processing is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is , If N in step 012IWS036, execute step 012IWS037)
According to this feature, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is preferably processed. It can be performed. That is, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed unintentionally even though the operation unit (the clear switch in this example) is continuously pressed, and the processing is preferably performed. It can be carried out.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
A specific information storage unit (for example, RAM012IW122b) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation unit has been operated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started,
When executing a plurality of processes including the setting value changing process, the process executing means executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times (eg, executes steps 012IWS025, S034, S048 in the game control microcomputer 100). Part to do)
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the third invention,
The normal initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing) is executed based on the operation means being operated when the power supply to the game machine is started, while the power supply to the game machine is started. Sometimes, an initialization process executing unit performs an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 2 process) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of an abnormality (for example, a part for executing steps 012IWS015 and S051 in the game control microcomputer 100). )When,
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process;
A second storage area (for example, a clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the initialization processing at the time of abnormality,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
A first state storage means (for example, a last time clear switch buffer) for storing the state of the previous operation means,
A second state storage means (for example, a clear switch buffer) for storing the current state of the operation means,
The determining means can determine that the operating means has been operated based on that the stored content of the first state storage means is in the off state and the stored content of the second state storage means is in the on state ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS041),
The first state storage means stores the ON state as the state of the operation means for the first time when the setting value changing process is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS037).
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 012IWS047 and S178) Prepare,
Suggestion production execution means,
Based on the setting value information input from the information output unit, it is possible to execute suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) (for example, second effect control CPU 012IW120b). Step 012 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode or a suggestive effect during game, a big hit mid-time suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to perform pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect (for example, the CPU 012IW120b for the second effect control). Executes steps 012IWS514, S709, and S906 so as not to perform the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, and the big hit mid-point suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, the present feature part 099IW includes the following fourth invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation and to be able to execute an advantageous state control based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestive effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is performed. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) 012IWS042 execution part),
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S114 to S117),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value has been set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 012IWS047 and S178) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, second effect) capable of executing suggestive effects (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit suggestive effect) (A part that executes steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906) in the control CPU 012IW120b),
When the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined setting value that is less advantageous to the player among the setting values of the plurality of stages. As a matter of course, the suggestive effect can be executed (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes steps 012IWS512, S707, and S904).
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes the steps 012IWS047 and S178 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (e.g., pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestion effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specificity of the set value being set (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table, in-game suggestive effect determination table, big hit suggestive effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined. A suggestive effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion that executes steps 012IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b),
The suggestive effect determination means,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined by using the determination data corresponding to the set value that is set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores in the setting value storage area of the RAM012IW122b). Execute steps 012IWS510, S705, and S902 based on the stored setting values),
When the set value information is not normally input, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value “1”) (for example, the second effect control). CPU for 012IW120b executes steps 012IWS512, S707, and S904 based on the set value "1")
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can prevent an increase in data capacity.

In the feature section 099IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect" includes not only determining whether to execute the suggestive effect, but also determining the effect mode of the suggestive effect. is there.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (e.g., pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect or It is also possible to make it possible to execute the initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time slot. Can be motivated to do, and can enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-9(A), (B), and FIGS. 8-29(A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B)),
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31(A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 8-31(D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fourth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (e.g., when the jackpot suggestion production is performed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion production, the jackpot suggestion production is recognized. It is described that it is possible to further provide a difficult character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the fourth invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 8-8).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 8-10).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the fourth invention,
An opening/closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 012IW500A/security cover 012IW500B/security cover 012IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation portion is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulation state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. In the state where the security cover 012IW500A is maintained, the operation state including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted, while in the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500A The regulated state due to is released, and the operating state of the setting key 012IW051 is allowed (Fig. 8-5, Fig. 8-6, Fig. 8-49 to Fig. 8-52).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.

Further, the feature part 099IW also includes the following fifth invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation and to be able to execute an advantageous state control based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestive effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is performed. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) 012IWS042 execution part),
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S114 to S117),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value has been set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 012IWS047 and S178) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, second effect) capable of executing suggestive effects (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit suggestive effect) (A part that executes steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906) in the control CPU 012IW120b),
The suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal (e.g., the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets N in step 012IWS513, When N in S708 and N in S905, the pre-game suggestive effect, the in-game suggestive effect, and the big hit suggestive effect are not executed)
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes the steps 012IWS047 and S178 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (e.g., pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestion effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specificity of the set value being set (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (e.g., pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect or It is also possible to make it possible to execute the initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time slot. Can be motivated to do, and can enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-9(A), (B), and FIGS. 8-29(A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B)),
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31(A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 8-31(D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (e.g., when the jackpot suggestion production is performed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion production, the jackpot suggestion production is recognized. It is described that it is possible to further provide a difficult character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 8-8).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 8-10).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
An opening/closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 012IW500A/security cover 012IW500B/security cover 012IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation portion is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulation state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. In the state where the security cover 012IW500A is maintained, the operation state including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted, while in the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500A The regulated state due to is released, and the operating state of the setting key 012IW051 is allowed (Fig. 8-5, Fig. 8-6, Fig. 8-49 to Fig. 8-52).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.

In addition, the feature part 099IW also includes the sixth invention described below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation and to be able to execute an advantageous state control based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestive effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is performed. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) 012IWS042 execution part),
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S114 to S117),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value has been set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 012IWS047 and S178) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, second effect) capable of executing suggestive effects (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit suggestive effect) (A part that executes steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906) in the control CPU 012IW120b),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode or a suggestive effect during game, a big hit mid-time suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to perform pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect without executing the first suggestive effect as the suggestive effect (for example, By executing steps 012IWS514, S709, and S906, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, and the big hit mid-time suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode).
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes the steps 012IWS047 and S178 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (e.g., pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestion effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specificity of the set value being set (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table, in-game suggestive effect determination table, big hit suggestive effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined. A suggestive effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion that executes steps 012IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b),
The suggestive effect determination means,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined by using the determination data corresponding to the set value that is set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores in the setting value storage area of the RAM012IW122b). Execute steps 012IWS510, S705, and S902 based on the stored setting values),
When the set value information is not normally input, using dedicated determination data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C, in-game suggestive effect determination table, big hit suggestive effect determination table), The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b uses the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestive effect determination table, and the big hit suggestive effect determination table, Steps 012 IWS514, S709, S906 are executed)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (e.g., pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect or It is also possible to make it possible to execute the initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time slot. Can be motivated to do, and can enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-9(A), (B), and FIGS. 8-29(A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B)),
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31(A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 8-31(D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (e.g., when the jackpot suggestion production is performed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion production, the jackpot suggestion production is recognized. It is described that it is possible to further provide a difficult character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 10 of the sixth invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 8-8).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 8-10).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the sixth invention,
An opening/closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 012IW500A/security cover 012IW500B/security cover 012IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation portion is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulation state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. In the state where the security cover 012IW500A is maintained, the operation state including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted, while in the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500A The regulated state due to is released, and the operating state of the setting key 012IW051 is allowed (Fig. 8-5, Fig. 8-6, Fig. 8-49 to Fig. 8-52).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, it is configured to be able to change to three types of effect modes A to C, and when the set value information is not normally input when the effect mode A is controlled, The player is configured to be able to execute the suggestive effect as if it is set to a predetermined set value that is less advantageous to the player (the above-described fourth invention), and if the effect mode B is controlled, the set value is set. When the information is not normally input, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggested effect (the above-mentioned fifth invention configuration), and when the effect mode C is controlled, the set value information is normally input. If not, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect is configured to be executable as the suggestive effect (the above-described sixth invention configuration). I can't stop. For example, the control method of any of the above-mentioned fourth invention to sixth invention may be switched depending on the game state. In this case, for example, if the game state is the normal state, if the set value information is not normally input, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect assuming that the preset value is set to have a low advantage for the player. In the configuration (configuration of the above-mentioned fourth invention), if the game state is a time-saving state, if the set value information is not normally input, the execution of the suggestive effect is limited (configuration of the above-mentioned fifth invention). If the game state is a probability change state, and the setting value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect is executable as the suggestion effect ( The above-mentioned configuration of the sixth invention) may be performed.

In addition, it is not necessary to configure the suggestive effect by all the control methods of the fourth invention to the sixth invention described above, and it is possible to implement the suggestive effect by using only one control method. Good.

In addition, in the characteristic part 099IW, when the set value command itself cannot be received due to missing or garbled data, the execution of the suggestive effect is controlled by the control method of the above fourth invention to the sixth invention. Although the effect is limited), the case is not limited to such an aspect. For example, if the set value command is received, but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestive effect may be limited. In this case, for example, each time a setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received on the side of the effect control means is stored, and when a new setting value command is received thereafter, a new setting value command is newly stored. When the set value indicated by the set value command received in step S1 and the set value stored last time do not match, it is determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and execution of the suggestive effect is performed by the control method of the above fourth invention to sixth invention. You may make it control (limit suggestive production).

Also, the way to make the game different for each of the set values "1" to "3" is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when the set value is an odd number such as "1" or "3", a series of holidays (a big hit continuously occurring during a probability change state) is likely to occur and a holiday will occur. It is configured so that the difference from when it is difficult is large, and in the case of even-numbered setting values such as the setting value “2”, it is configured so that the susceptibility to the consecutive holidays is relatively constant and does not change. The suggestive effect suggesting that the number is an odd number may be configured to be executable. Then, in this case, when the set value command cannot be normally received, the execution of the suggestive effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control method of the above fourth invention to sixth invention. It may be configured to perform (limit the suggestive effect).

Further, the seventh aspect of the present invention described below is also included in the characteristic part 099IW. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
And a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value that is set,
The suggestion effect executing means, at least, a suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect before game) at a ratio different depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is described that the game machine is characterized by being able to execute (or initial result production, etc.). Can be motivated to do, and can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of production identification information (eg, decorative design),
The suggestion effect execution means, during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display, suggestive effect in which different identification information for effect is displayed according to the set value being set (for example, It is described that it is possible to execute the display of odd-numbered initial outcomes. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect according to the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 8). As shown in −26(A) and (B), a pre-game suggestive effect determination table with different determination values is used)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is capable of executing a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion during game play or a suggestion during big hit) that suggests the set value that has been set, after the variable display is started,
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may be set to have a higher degree of reliability with respect to the suggested setting value than the suggestion effect, and such a configuration can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

Further, the characteristic part 099IW also includes the eighth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the motivation for playing the game cannot be effectively given and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
And a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value that is set,
The suggestion effect executing means sets at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-9(A), (B), and FIGS. 8-29(A), (B)).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and to enhance amusement of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine that variably displays and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns according to a different ratio depending on whether the set value is changed or not (for example, FIG. 8-9(A), B))),
It is described that the variable display execution means may be capable of executing variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when it is not changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns according to a different ratio when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 8-9(A) and (B)),
The variable display execution means can execute variable display using a common background image when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, a specific super reach effect). The suggestive effect can be executed based on the fact that the notice effect has been executed, or the like (for example, when the big hit occurs within the specific period, the suggestive effect during the big hit can be executed. (See A) and (B))
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

Further, the ninth aspect of the present invention described below is also included in the characteristic part 099IW. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that it is not possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is not possible to sufficiently raise the interest. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
And a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value that is set,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B)).
A gaming machine is described, which further includes an informing means capable of informing information on the executed suggestion effect (for example, a part where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516). According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggestive effect has been executed (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the suggested effect that has been executed (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the information on the suggested effect that has been executed while waiting for the customer for which variable display has not been executed (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
Information generating means for generating information (e.g., execution history information) relating to the executed suggestive effect;
Image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) in which the information can be read by an imaging device;
It is described that a display unit (for example, the image display device 5) that displays the specific image in a manner that can be captured by the image capturing device may be provided. Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

Further, the characteristic part 099IW also includes the tenth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize by other effects, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
And a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value that is set,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31(A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect is further provided (for example, when the suggestive effect during a big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. (See (D))
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the 10th invention,
The limiting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timings of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, executing one of them in the fanfare period and ending the other). Change to run in period)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, the execution of the accessory effect is prohibited when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed. See FIG. 8-31(D). )
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
When the suggestive effect is executed, the limiting means executes the predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestive effect is difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 012IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the normal mode (for example, a big hit suggestion). Control so that it does not stop at a position that overlaps with the dialogue image produced by the production))
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
The suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect that displays a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include display on one display unit (for example, the image display device 5),
It is described that the one display means may display the display related to the suggestive performance with priority over the display related to the predetermined performance, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest. You can

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

The 11th invention shown below is also included in the characteristic part 099IW. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the entertainment may be deteriorated by executing the setting suggesting production which is not preferable for the player. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
A setting suggestion executing means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting a set value being set,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (e.g., when the jackpot suggestion production is performed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion production, the jackpot suggestion production is recognized. A game machine characterized by further providing a difficult character effect, a light guide effect, an error display, etc. is described. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the 11th invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, character effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 012IW101). According to such a configuration, , The production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the 11th invention,
A light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 012IW103) having a light transmitting property capable of transmitting light,
A light-emitting body provided so that light can enter from the end surface of the light guide plate,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflection unit that reflects the light that has entered the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emits the light to the front surface of the gaming machine.
The predetermined notification unit is configured to be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, light guide plate effect) in which light is emitted from the light emitting body to the front surface of the gaming machine from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of presentation.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the 11th invention,
It is described that the predetermined notifying means may be capable of executing the predetermined notification for displaying an error, and such a configuration can appropriately notify the error.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the 11th invention,
The setting suggestion executing means is a first setting suggestion that suggests that the setting has been made to the first set value (for example, suggestive presentation during big hit in the first presentation mode. See FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B)). , A second setting suggestion that suggests that the player is set to a second set value that is more advantageous to the player than the first set value (for example, suggestion during big hit in the third effect mode. FIG. 8-31 ( (See A) and (B)),
The predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate when the first setting suggestion is executed than when the second setting suggestion is executed (for example, see FIG. 8-31(E)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the 11th invention,
A setting suggestion setting means capable of setting an execution rate of setting suggestion is provided (for example, a setting screen is displayed after power-on, operation means such as a push button 31B, operation means such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (management Can be operated only by the person) so that the setting related to the setting suggestion effect can be changed)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine that variably displays identification information,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) on which the identification information is arranged is provided.
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

In addition, the characteristic part 099IW includes the twelfth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that the gambling property may become too high in a setting with a high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
And a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 8-8).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 8-8(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that has been set (for example, see FIG. 8-8(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 8-8(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing with a gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game more than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that makes up a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when it is set to the second set value than when it is set to the first set value (for example, FIGS. 8-8(A) and (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting a set value (for example, a suggestive effect during a big hit) may be provided in a predetermined control period in the advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
Equipped with production execution means that can execute production,
The effect execution means is configured to be able to execute a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, interval effect, ending effect, etc.) during a predetermined control period in the advantageous state regardless of the set value being set. According to such a configuration, the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be set in advance according to the set value that is set. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to multiple types of advantageous states,
The game control means can control one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value that has been set,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, see FIG. 8-8(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

In addition, the feature part 099IW includes the thirteenth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that the gambling property may become too high in a setting with a high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the 13th invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing);
And a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 8-10).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the 13th invention,
The variable display period varies depending on the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 8-10).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the 13th invention,
It is stated that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be different depending on the set value that has been set, and with such a configuration, the gambling performance becomes too high. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the 13th invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing with a gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game more than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that makes up a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period for variable display is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (see, for example, FIG. 8-10).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the 13th invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period for the variable display may be set in advance according to the set value that is set, and with such a configuration, the gambling performance becomes too high. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the 13th invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determination means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIGS. 8-10).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the 13th invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, the case where the setting value can be set in three stages of the setting values “1” to “3” is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, setting of four stages or more is possible. It may be configured such that it can be set to a value or can be set to a two-step set value. In this case, for example, it is configured so that the setting value can be set in 6 stages, and the expectation degree (reliability) for the big hit is lowest when the setting value is "1", and the expectation degree for the big hit (when the setting value is "6" ( The reliability may be the highest.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General prize hole 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary pattern display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start opening Switch 23... Count switch 30... Ball hitting handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 100... Game control microcomputers 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
Power supply means,
First control means for performing first control by receiving power supply from the power supply means,
Second control means for performing second control by receiving power supply from the power supply means,
Monitoring means for monitoring the power supplied to the second control means and notifying the second control means,
The first control means notifies the second control means of instruction information capable of specifying that power is supplied and the first control is started,
The second control means
At the start of control, at least the first control means and the second control means are restarted when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply has changed from less than a predetermined value to more than the predetermined value. The second control is started based on the instruction information from the first control means,
At the start of control, when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the power supply to be supplied is equal to or higher than the predetermined value, it is specified that only the second control means has restarted, and the second control is started. A gaming machine characterized by:

Images